Buchblock

SYNTACTIC CHANGES IN ENGLISH-ARABIC TRANSLATION: WITH
REFERENCE INTO BBC NEWS TEXTS
Abstract
This study focuses on the stylistic changes that occur when translating English political
news into Arabic. It attempts to find the answers to the research question, “ What is the
nature of the stylistic changes that occur in the Arabic translation? Towards this end, it
will examine the stylistic change in Vinay and Darbelnet (1995) procedure such as
transposition (shift). At the same time, it will also look at the same data from the
perspectives of the ideas of styles in Ghazala (1995) such as fronting, complex-simple,
formal-informal. In another words, although the headings will use the labels in Vinay
and Darbelnet (1995), each data will be examined from the ideas of Ghazala (1995) as
well. Wherever necessary, the stylistic difference shall be captured using both X‘-Theory
representation either as phrase markers (tree diagrams) or in linear structures using label
bracketing and narrative descriptions. The findings have shown that translating from
English news into Arabic has involved many linguistic forms (words, phrases, clauses,
sentences, metaphorical expressions) that have cultural import.
Key words: Syntax, Morphology, Style, Culture, and Discourse
Vinay and Darbelnet (1995).
Vinay and Darbelnet (1995) consider comparative analysis an essential applied linguistic
approach to translation as it is a more direct approach. They focus on the pragmatic
stratum which determines the choice of lexical and grammatical devices in the text. In
their approach, they offer two strategies: direct translation and oblique translation. The
former strategy comprises three procedures: (a) borrowing, (b) calque, and (c) literal
translation. They employ direct translation whenever a structural and conception
parallelism exists between both languages. The latter strategy, oblique translation, has
four procedures: (a) transposition (shift), (b) modulation, (c) equivalence, (d) adaptation
which are used whenever grammatical, lexical, structural or conceptional divergences are
required due to certain stylistic effects in the source text. Each of the above ideas will be
elaborated below
Transposition (Shift).
1
For Vinay and Darbelnet (1995:36) this involves replacing one word class with another
without changing the meaning of the message. They add that besides being a special
translation procedure, transposition can also be applied within a language. They note that
in translation there are two type of transposition: (a) obligatory transposition and (b)
optional transposition. They also indicate that this method requires the translator to
change the grammar of the SL text; and the translator needs to shift the grammatical
make-up of the SL to fit that of the TL to achieve an equivalent effect or to produce the
same effect on the readership of the translation as was obtained on the readership of the
original.From a stylistic point of view, the base and the transposed expression do not
necessarily have the same value. Translators carry out a transposition if the translation
obtained fits better into the text or allows a particular nuance of style to be retained. The
transposed forms are generally more literary in character than the original (Vinay and
Darbelnet, 1995:36).
Ghazala (1995).
Ghazala (1995:242) notes that style of short sentences has an important function as it
heightens the tempo of action in a text which is written in the form of a story apart from
the fact that such a style accelerates events and arouses suspense. He adds that it is the
only type of style which reflects a function of acceleration, that can be sensed by reading
the text aloud and quickly. Hence, in order to keep this function, it is suggested that short
sentences be re-echoed in the Arabic translation (Ghazala, 1995:242). Ghazala further
notes that the style of long sentences is better to be imitated in Arabic because it has
important stylistic functions which are a part of the meaning of the text. He adds that
translating an English long sentence into Arabic long sentences might be less problematic
than breaking it into short sentences (Ghazala, 1995:245).
The X‟ Theory.
According to Culicover (1997:134) X‘-Theory is a theory of phrase structure; that is a

theory which constitutes a possible phrase in natural language. He adds that within this
theory phrase structure concerns the hierarchical and left-to-right relationships between
syntactic categories. He further suggests that every phrase has a head; certain head take
2
complements; and such a relationship is characterized by the fact that they are sisters:
each c-commands the other, and they are dominated by the same node, Culicover
(1997:135) as in (1) below where V‘ (verb phrase), V (verb) is the head while NP (noun
phrase) is the complement. Within this theory, as in the diagram in (1) below the V‘, V
and NP are all nodes, and the V and NP nodes are sisters and that V‘ and NP c-
command the other which means between them there exist some grammatical
relationships.
(1) V‘
V NP
He also contends that, ‗An important principle of X‘ Theory ―…is that across syntactic
categories, complements, specifiers, and adjunct bear the same configurational
relationship to the head.‖ Culicover (1997:136). Further, ―In English…the complement
of the head appears adjacent to it and to the right of it, while the specifier appears to the
left.‖ Culicover (1997:136). In other languages the sequence may be the reverse; that is,
instead of V-NP
Data Aanalysis:
Stylistic Changes Due to Transposition (shift).
In the following subsections, we will present some stylistic changes due to the
changes in tenses and changes in syntactic constituents.
Stylistic Changes to Past Continuous Tense.
Consider the following data in (10a) and its Arabic translation in (1b):
(1) (a) ST: ‗Maliki endorsed as new PM‘
Iraq's President Jalal Talabani has asked Shia politician Jawad al-Maliki to
form the country's next government.
BBC Saturday, 22 April 2006.
(b) TT: ٟ‫اف اٌّدرّغ اٌؼشال‬١‫ِح ذّثً اط‬ٛ‫ً زى‬١‫ذ ذؾى‬٠‫ اس‬: ٟ‫اٌّا ٌى‬
‫ دِح‬ٕٞٛ٠ ٗٔ‫ِح اٌّمثٍح ا‬ٛ‫ً اٌسى‬١‫ ترؾى‬ٟٔ ‫ظ خال ي اٌطٍثا‬١‫فٗ ِٓ طشف اٌشئ‬١ٍ‫ا تؼذ ذى‬ٙ‫ٍم‬٠ ‫ي وٍّح‬ٚ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٟ‫ لاي اٌّاٌى‬ٚ
.‫ح‬١‫ضغ زذ ال ػّاي اٌؼٕف اٌطائف‬ٌٛ ٝ‫ أٗ ِغؼ‬ٍٝ‫ّا فغش ػ‬١‫ ف‬ٟ‫ؼ اٌؼشال‬١‫ اٌد‬ٟ‫ؾاخ اٌّغٍسح ف‬١ٍ١ٌّ‫ا‬
3
( c) Trs: (al maleki : ureed tashkeel hukuma tumathel atyaf al mujtam‟ al „raqi)
( wa qala al maliki fi awal kalimah yalqaha b‟da takleefih min taraf al raees jalal al
talabani bitashkil al hukuma al muqbila enahu yanwi damj al milishat al musalaha fi al
jeish al „raqi, fimah fasarah „la enahu mas‟a liwad‟ had li a‟mal al „unf al taefeyah.)
With respect to the data in (1a) above, we are concerned with the clause Iraq‟s President
Jalal Talabani has asked. Its linear structure is as in (a‘) below and the structure of its
corresponding Arabic translation in a phrase marker is in (b‘):
(a‘) ST: Iraq‘s President Jalal Talabani has asked…

[ [ Iraq‘s President] [ [ Jalal Talabani] ] [ has asked]…]
IP N‘ IP V‘
(b‘) TT: […[takleefih min taraf al raees jalal al talabani. …]
V‘
V Adjunct
takleefih P‘
‗asking‘
P Adjunct‘
min taraf D‘
‗by‘ Adjunct
al-raees
‗the President‘ IP
[ ... Jalal al-Talabani]
It is noticed that the translator has made stylistic changes that lead to optional
transposition. From the above data, it is noticed that the English phrase has asked in the
ST is a present perfect, and to translate this into Arabic, the translator must used a past
simple. This is because Arabic has no corresponding tense for the English present perfect.
It is noticed, however, that the translator has used the past continuous tense translating has
asked into ٗ‫ف‬١ٍ‫ذى‬ (takleefahu) (orally takleefih) ‗was asking‘. If the translator had
translated has asked into the past simple, the stylistic structure would have been
acceptable. The translator has, however, made an optional stylistic change by using the
past continuous tense in the TT text.
4
The verb phrase has asked consists of the verb has and the main verb asked in a past
form. On the other hand, the same structure in the TT consists of two lexical words which
are the main verb ‫ف‬١ٍ‫( ذى‬takleef) „asked‘ and the pronoun ٖ‫( ا‬ahu) ‗him‘ (colloquially as –
ih) that refers to the PM, al-Maliki.Looking at both (a‘) and (b‘) above in a broader
syntactic term, the English ST is of the structure [ N‘-Subordinate sentence—Predicate…]
where the sentence begins with a genetive noun phrase, the corresponding Arabic
translation has a structure [V‘-P‘-D‘-[ Subordinate sentence]] where the sentence begins
with a verb. In Ghazala‘s (1995) view of style, this is a case of movements which he
terms as ‗fronting‘, making the sentence a formal style.
Stylistic Changes to the Past Simple Tense.
We will now consider the English data in (12a) and its Arabic translation in (3b) below:
(2) (a) ST: „US warns Russia over aid to Iran‟

BBC Wednesday, 19 April 2006
US officials believe it has helped bolster Iranian nuclear know-how.
(b) TT: ‫ا‬٠ٚٛٔ ْ‫شا‬٠‫لف ِغاػذج ا‬ٛ‫ ت‬ٛ‫عى‬ٌّٛ ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫ِطا ٌثح اِش‬
‫ا‬ٙ‫ض لذسذ‬٠‫ ذؼض‬ٟ‫شج ف‬١‫شاْ عاػذخ االخ‬٠‫ا ال‬١‫ع‬ٚ‫ا س‬ِٙ‫ ذمذ‬ٟ‫ح اٌر‬١ٕ‫ْ اْ اٌخثشاخ اٌف‬ٛ١١‫ى‬٠‫ْ االِش‬ٌٛٚ‫ؼرمذ اٌّغؤ‬٠ٚ
.‫ح‬٠ٌٕٚٛ‫ا‬
(c) Trs wa ya‟ataqed al-masulun al-amrikiyoun ana al-khibrat al-faniyah alati tuqadimaha
rusyia lie ran sa‟dat al-akhira fi ta‟ziz qudrataha al-nuwawiya
The following linear structure in lablled braketting in (a‘) and (b‘) show a syntactic
difference between the ST and the TT:
(a‘) ST:…. it has helped bolster Iranian nuclear know-how.
[… [ it ] [has [helped [ bolster [Iranian nucleaur know-how]]]

IP Spec I‘ V‘ V‘
(b‘) TT: ‫ض‬٠‫ ذؼض‬ٟ‫شج ف‬١‫شاْ عاػذخ االخ‬٠‫ا ال‬١‫ع‬ٚ‫ا س‬ِٙ‫ ذمذ‬ٟ‫ح اٌر‬١ٕ‫ْ اْ اٌخثشاخ اٌف‬ٛ١١‫ى‬٠‫ْ االِش‬ٌٛٚ‫ؼرمذ اٌّغؤ‬٠ٚ
‫ا‬ .‫ح‬٠ٌٕٚٛ‫لذسذٗ ا‬
sa‟dat al-akhira fi t‟aziz
[…..[ s‘adat [al-akhira [fi t‘‘aziz…]]]].
IP V Adv P
5
From the above examples, it is noticed that the present perfect tense has helped in the ST
has been translated into the past simple tense in the TT. The translator does not retain the
original tense as there is no similar tense in Arabic; instead, he has to resort changing it to
the past tense. It is an obligatory change when translating a present perfect tense like has
helped.
Stylistic Changes to Future Simple Tense.
We will now move on to consider an English data containing a continuous tense in (5a), its
corresponding Arabic translation in (5b) and the Arabic transliteration in (5c):
(3) (a): ST: Abbas moves to Gaza for pull out
BBC: Monday, 25 July, 2005
Palestinian leader Mahmoud Abbas has announced he is moving his office to
Gaza until the completion of Israel's withdrawal from the territory.
(b) TT: ٟ‫ غؼح ٌّزبثؼخ االٔـذبة االؿغائ‬ٌٝ‫ٕمً ِمغٖ ا‬٠ ‫ػجبؽ‬

‫ ِٓ اٌمطاع‬ٍٟ١‫اء ا الٔغساب االعشائ‬ٙ‫ أر‬ٝ‫ غضج زر‬ٌٝ‫ٕمً ِىرثٗ ا‬١‫د ػثاط أٗ ع‬ّٛ‫ ِس‬ٟٕ١‫ظ اٌفٍغط‬١‫اػٍٓ اٌشئ‬
(c) Trs:„bas yanqul maqarahu ela ghaza li mutaba‟t al ensehab al esraeli
A‟lana al raees al filistini mahmud abas enahu sayanqul maktabahu ela ghaza
hata entiha al ensehab al esraeeli min al qata‟.
The following linear structures in (a‘) and (b‘) in leballed bracketing show a difference
between them:
(a‘) ST: … he is moving his office…
[…. [ he ] [ is [ moving [ his office]]]]

IP Spec I‘ V‘ N‘
(b‘) ٗ‫ٕمً ِىرث‬١‫أٗ ع‬

)enahu sayanqul maktabahu)
[…[ enahu] [ sa [ yanqul [Maktabahu]…]]
‗de will move office -his‘
It is noticed that in the (a‘-b‘) above, the translator has changed the present continuous
tense of the ST to a future simple tense ‫( ط‬sa) „will‘ and ً‫ٕم‬٠ (yanqel) ‗move‘. Besides,
the translator has kept the sentence structure [Spec- I‘-V‘-N‘] in both languages. While
the basic structure remains similar, the shift in the tense is in keeping with the inherent
style of the Arabic language which is in congruence with Hatim‘s (1997) view when
translating across cultural boundaries.
6
Style in Past Continuous Tense of the ST.
In this subsection we will show three cases of the behavior of past continuous tense of the ST
when translated to Arabic ST. The first case is exemplified by the data in (8a-c) below where a
past continuous tense of the ST becomes a present continuous in the TT:
(4) (a) ST: Syria devices Hariri probe „bias‟

BBC: Saturday, 21 January 2006
He said he was studying projects to free up the party system and draw more
Syrians into the political process,
(b) TT: ٞ‫غ‬٠‫بي اٌذغ‬١‫ اغز‬ٟ‫ك ف‬١‫ٕزمض ٌجٕخ اٌزذم‬٠ ‫االؿض‬

‫ اذازح اٌّداي‬ٚ ‫ْ ا الزضاب‬ٛٔ‫ً لا‬٠‫ذسط خطح ٌرؼذ‬٠ ٗٔ‫ لاي ا‬ٚ ‫ح‬١‫ا ع‬١‫ اخشاء اصال زاخ ع‬ٍٝ‫ خطاتٗ ػضِٗ ػ‬ٟ‫اوذ االعذ ف‬ٚ
.ٟ‫ا ع‬١‫ اٌؼًّ اٌغ‬ٟ‫ٓ ٌالٔخشاط ف‬١١ٕ‫اط‬ٌّٛ‫ذ ِٓ ا‬٠‫اِاَ اٌّض‬
(c ) Trs: wa akada al asad fi khetabih „zmih „la ejra eslahat seyaseeyah wa qala
enahu yadrus khuta li t‟deel qanun al ahzab wa etaha lil majal amam al
mazeed min al muateneen lil enkherat fi al amal al seyasi
The underlined part of the ST and the TT can be assigned the following linear structures in (a‘)
and (b‘) respectively:
(a‘) ST: …he was studying projects…

[ [ he ] [was [ studying projects….]]]
IP Spec I‘ V‘
(b‘) TT: ‫ذسط خطح‬٠ ٗٔ‫ا‬

enahu yadrus khuta…
[… [enahu [ …. [ yadrus [khuta …]]]
IP Spec I‘ V‘ (+continuous, +present)
Between the (a‘) and (b‘) above, basically the syntactic structure is the same. The
difference that remains is in the change of the tense from a past continuous in the ST to a
present continuous in the TT. The Arabic verb form ‫ذسط‬٠ (yadrus) ‗+male, studying‘ is in
the present continuous and is recording the third person male subject noun phrase.
Stylistic Changes in Prepositional Phrases.
In this subsection we will consider three cases of stylistic changes due to changes in
prepositional phrases. First, we consider (11a-c) below:
7
(5) (a) ST: Maliki endorsed as new Iraqi PM
BBC: Saturday, 22 April 2006
President Bush also hinted that the agreement on Iraq's new leaders could
pave the way to the start of an American withdrawal.
(b) TT; ٟ‫بف اٌّجزّغ اٌؼغال‬١‫ِخ رّثً اغ‬ٛ‫ً دى‬١‫ض رلى‬٠‫ اع‬: ٟ‫اٌّب ٌى‬
"‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫اخ االِش‬ٛ‫ عرٕغسة اٌم‬,‫ح‬١‫اخ اٌؼشال‬ٛ‫ذ ِٓ اٌم‬٠‫ً اٌّض‬١‫ػ " ِغ ذؾى‬ٛ‫ اضاف ت‬ٚ
( c) Trs : al maleki : aureed tashkeel hukuma tumathel atyaf al mujtam‟ al‟raqi

wa adafa bush: m‟a tashkeel al mazeed min al quat al „raqeeyah.
Satansaheb al quat al amrikeyah. Wa bidawraha „tabarat wazeerat al
kharejeyah al amrekeyah kundaleeza rais al etefaq “ enjazan haman”.
We are concerned with the underlined constituents in (5a-c) above. The following phrase
markers in (a‘) and (b‘) show the difference in the prepositional phrases under the P‘
nodes:
(a‘) ST: …could pave the way to the start of an American withdrawal.
I‘
I V‘
V N‘
could
pave D‘
P‘
the way P‘ Adjunct
to the start P‘
of an American withdrawal.
(b‘) ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫اخ االِش‬ٛ‫عرٕغسة اٌم‬

Satansaheb al quat al amrikeyah....
8
I‘
I V‘
sa
‗will‘ V adjunct‘
‗draw‘
D‘ adjunct
al quat D‘
‗the forces‘
al amreekiyah
‗ the foreign‘
Noticeably, in translating the prepositional phrase of the English ST ...to the start of an
American withdrawal… into Arabic, the translator has done two things: (a) has dropped
the preposition to in the English prepositional phrase and has replaced it with the future
model ‫( ؽ‬sa) ‗will‘, and (b) has reorganized the English prepositional phrase of an
American withdrawal into Arabic inflectional phrase ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫اخ االِش‬ٛ‫( عرٕغسة اٌم‬Satansaheb
al quat al amrikeyah) (literally: ‗will draw the forces the american‘). Overall, what has
been a [I‘-V‘-D‘-P‘-P‘] constituent sequence of two prepositional phrases in English has
been changed stylistically in Arabic to be [ ...I‘-V‘-D‘-D‘] without a prepositional
phrase.
Stylistic Changes in Adverbial Phrase.
In this subsection we will show three examples of stylistic changes in adverbial phrases.
Consider the first case in (14a-b) below:
(6) (a) ST: Sharon arrives in Paris for talks
BBC: Tuseday, 26 July, 2005.
Only a year ago, Mr. Chirac was making it plain that Mr. Sharon
was not welcome in Paris.
(b) TT: ‫شان‬١‫ظ ال خشاء ِسادثاخ ِغ ؽ‬٠‫ تاس‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٚ‫ؽاس‬

‫د‬ٛٙ١ٌ‫ راٌه تؼذ اْ دػا ا‬ٚ ‫ظ‬٠‫ تاس‬ٟ‫ش ِشزة تٗ ف‬١‫ْ غ‬ٚ‫ذ تاْ ؽاس‬ٛ‫ض‬ٛ‫ ت‬ٟ‫ز‬ٛ٠ ‫شان‬١‫ واْ ذصشف ؽ‬,‫ازذ فمظ‬ٚ َ‫لثً ػا‬
. ‫ فشٔغا‬ٟ‫ح ف‬١ِ‫ اٌؼذاء ٌٍغا‬ٟ‫ً تغثة ِا اػرثشٖ ذصاػذا ف‬١‫ اعشائ‬ٌٝ‫دشج ا‬ٌٙ‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫ٓ ا‬١١‫اٌفشٔغ‬
( c) Trs: qabla „am wahaed faqat kana tasaruf Chirac….
9
The following phrase markers in (a‘) and (b‘) below show the syntactic similarity
between the ST and the TT:
(a‘) Only a year ago, Mr Chirac…
COMP‘
COMP‘ IP
Spec. Mr. Chirac …..
ADV‘
Spec ADV‘
Prt‘ Spec ADV
only D‘
a year ago
(b‘) ‫شان‬١‫ واْ ذصشف ؽ‬,‫ازذ فمظ‬ٚ َ‫لثً ػا‬

… qabla „am wahed faqat kana tasaruf…
COMP‘
COMP‘ IP‘
Spec Spec I‘
ADB‘ Ø V‘
kana tasaruf Chirac
(+past) „behave Chirac‟.
qabla am wahed faqat

‗before one year
That is, in both ST and the TT texts, the sentential adverb phrase is positioned at the
beginning of the sentence. A closer look at the structures, however, show that the Arabic
10
adverbial phrase also consists of four lexical words (qabla am wahed faqat) to the ST three,
a year ago.
Stylistic Changes in Noun Phrases.
In this subsection we will look at stylistic changes in noun phrases or determiner phrases
(i.e., a noun phrase containing a determiner). We consider the data in (7a-c) below:
(7) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier.
The main Sunni coalition, the Iraqi Accord Front, has shown initial agreement
with Mr Maliki's nomination, a spokesman said.
(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬.

‫اص‬ٛ‫خ ج‬١‫ رغك‬ٍٝ‫خ ػ‬١‫ب اٌّجضئ‬ٙ‫افمز‬ِٛ ‫َ اٌجّؼخ‬ٛ٠ ‫خ لض ا ثضد‬١ٕ‫ اثغػ اٌجّبػبد اٌـ‬ٟ٘ ٚ ٟ‫افك اٌؼغال‬ٛ‫خ اٌز‬ٙ‫وبٔذ جج‬ٚ
.‫ػعاء‬ٌٛ‫ؾ ا‬١‫ ٌّٕصت عئ‬ٟ‫اٌّبٌى‬
(c) Trs: Wa kanat jabhat al tawafeq al „raqeeyah wa heya abraz al jama‟at al

suneeyah fi al bilad qad abdat al youm al jum‟a muwafaqateha al mabdaeyah „la
tarsheeh juad al maleke lemansab reasat al wizara.
The phrase markers in (a‘) and (b‘) below show the difference between the structure of
the noun phrases:
(a‘) ST: The main Sunni coalition….
N‘
Spec Adjunct
D‘ N‘
D N N Adjunct
the main
N
Sunni coalition
t
h
e
11
(b‘) TT: (‫ح‬١ٕ‫ اتشص اٌدّاػاخ اٌغ‬ٟ٘ ٚ).
(wa heya abraz al jama‟at al Suneeyah…)
COMP‘
COMP Adjunct
Conj N‘
wa N Adjunct
‗and‘
heya A‘
‗she‘
A Adjunct
abraz N‖
‗main‘
D‘ Adjunct
al jama‟at D‘
‗the group‘
al Suneeyah.
‗the Sunis‘
The noun phrase of the structure [D‘-N‘] in …the main Suni coalition…of the ST has
changed into a complex conjoined noun phrase [conj-N-A-D‘D‘] in the Arabic TT as in
‫خ‬١ٕ‫ اثغػ اٌجّبػبد اٌـ‬ٟ٘ ٚ (wa heya abraz al jama‟at al Suneeyah) ‗ and- she- main -the
group- the Sunnis‘. Here, the translator has translated the above noun English phrase into
Arabic with a different structural form as perceived by him and incongruence with his
perception of the Arabic language. In particular, he begins his phrase with a conjunction ٚ
(wa) ‗and‘ and added the necessary determiners ‫( اي‬al-)‗the‘ for each of the nouns so that
it becomes grammatically acceptable and easily understood by an Arabic reader .
Stylistic Changes in Verb Phrase and Complex Clauses.
In this subsection, we will examine the stylistic changes that occur to the English ST data
with respect to verb phrases and verb phrase complement. First, we will consider the data
in (8a) which contains a verb phrase complement and its translation in (8b) as well as its
transliteration in (8c) below:
12
(18) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier‟
Members of Iraq's new parliament meet on Saturday to vote on a new
prime minister and other posts after months of wrangling over candidates.
(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬

‫ا‬ٙ١‫ٌح تّا ف‬ٚ‫ اٌذ‬ٟ‫ح ف‬٠‫اد‬١‫ ػذد ِٓ إٌّاصة اٌغ‬ٍٝ‫َ اٌغثد ٌٍّصادلح ػ‬ٛ١ٌ‫ح ( اٌثشٌّاْ) اخرّاػا ا‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫ذؼمذ اٌدّؼ‬
. ‫ِح‬ٛ‫ظ اٌسى‬١‫ ِٕصة سئ‬ٛ٘ ٚ ‫اوثش ٘زٖ إٌّاصة اثاسج ٌٍدذي‬
(c ) Trs: T‟aqed al jam‟eyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeyah ( al barlaman) ejtema‟an al

youm al sabt lil musadaqa „ala adad min al manaseb al seyadiyah fi al dawlah bima
fiha akthar hatheh al manaseb ethara lil jadal wa huwa manseb raees al hukuma.
We are concerned with the underlined constituents of the ST and the TT. The following
linear structures in (a‘) and (b‘) show the syntactic difference:
(a‘) …meet on Saturday to vote on a new Prime Minister …
[…meet on Saturday [ [to vote [ on [a [new Prime Minister]]]…]]]

V‘ IP V‘ P‘ D‘ A‘
(b‘) ‫ٌح‬ٚ‫ اٌذ‬ٟ‫ح ف‬٠‫اد‬١‫ ػذد ِٓ إٌّاصة اٌغ‬ٍٝ‫َ اٌغثد ٌٍّصادلح ػ‬ٛ١ٌ‫ا‬
(… al youm al sabt lil musadaqa „la „dad min al manaseb al seyaseeyah fi al
dawlah…)
[ …[ al youm [al sabt [lil musadaqa ala adad [min al manaseb [al seyaseeyah [fi al dawlah…]]]]]]]
D‘ D‘ P‘ P‘ D‘ P‘
‗the day‘ ‗the Saturday‘ „for endorsement‟ on number from the politicians the country…
What used to be a verb phrase complement in the ST, ..on Saturday v[to vote on a new
Prime Minister ] has been translated into Arabic TT as a series of determiner phrases and
prepositional phrases. There is no verb. So, the structure is completely changed. The verb
to vote in the ST text has been translated into TT as a postposition determiner phrase
ٍٝ‫( ٌٍّصادلح ػ‬lil musadaqa „la) ‗the endorsement on‘ = [D-N-P]. Apparently, the
translator has translated it in accordance with his perception of the Arabic language and
hence making it appropriate to the Arabic readers which is congruent with Fishman‘s
(1972) ideas that language is a reflection of the socio-cultural and the values and
orientations of its speakers.
Stylistic Changes in Adjectival Phrases.
13
In this section we will present the variation of stylistic changes in five adjectival phrases, namely
sharp opposition, initial insurgent, new high, parliamentary session and suspected insurgent.
Consider first the case on the adjectival phrase sharp opposition as in (9a-c) below:
(9) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier

Attempts by Mr. Jaafri to remain as prime minister had raised sharp
opposition from Sunnis, Kurds and sector groups

.‫ح‬١ٔ‫ اٌدّاػاخ اٌؼٍّا‬ٚ ‫ اٌغٕح‬ٚ ‫ذج ِٓ خأة االوشاد‬٠‫اخٗ ِؼاسضح ؽذ‬ٚ ‫ لذ‬ٞ‫ر اٌدؼفش‬١‫واْ ذشؽ‬ٚ
(c) Trs: (al-jam‘eeyah al-wataneeyah tandur fi tarshih al-j‘fari).

wa kana tarsheeh al j‟fari qad wajaha mu‟arada shadeeda min janeb al
akrad wa al sunah wa al jama‟at al „lmaneeya
We are concerned with the underlined constituent. The linear structures in (a‘) and (b‘)
below show their differences:
(a) ST: …had raised sharp opposition from Sunnis,…
[ …….[ had [ raised [ sharp [opposition] [from Sunnis]]]].

IP I‘ V‘ A‘ N‘ P‘
(b‘) TT: …‫ذج‬٠‫اخٗ ِؼاسضح ؽذ‬ٚ ‫لذ‬

...qad wajaha mu‟arada shadeeda…
[… [ qad [ wajaha [ [mu‟arada] [shadeeda…]]].

IP CONJ‘ V‘ A‘ N‘ A
‗and‘ ‗faced‘ ‗opposition‘ ‗hard‘
There is a difference in the order of the noun and the qualifying adjective: in English it is[
A‘-N‘ ] while in Arabic it is [N‘-A‘]. Also in Arabic significantly the adjective phrase
begins with a conjunction ٚ (wa) ‗and‘ which is structurally typical in Arabic.
Stylistic Changes in Articles: a, an, the.
In this section we will examine cases of English data containing the definite the and
Indefinite articles: a and an. Consider the pairs of data in (10a-b), (10a-b) and (10a-b)
14
below:
(10) (a) ST: Other posts due to be endorsed on Saturday include the president and
parliamentary speaker and their deputies.
ْ‫ظ اٌثشٌّا‬١‫ سئ‬ٚ ‫ح‬٠‫س‬ّٛٙ‫ظ اٌد‬١‫ سئ‬ٟ‫ثسث اٌثشٌّاْ ِٕصث‬٠ ْ‫ ِٓ اٌّمشس ا‬ٚ
(c) Trs: al jam‟eeyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeya tandur fi tarsheeh al maliki

Wa min al muqarar an yabhath al barlaman mansebei raees al
jamhureeyah wa raees al barlaman.
The definite determiner phrases, the President and parliamentary speaker, of the ST has
been changed to a series of conjoined indefinite phrases in Arabic TT, ٚ ‫ح‬٠‫س‬ّٛٙ‫ظ اٌد‬١‫سئ‬
ْ‫ظ اٌثشٌّا‬١‫( سئ‬raees al jamhureeyah wa raees al barlaman) ‗president the government
and president the parliament‘ which is literally ‗president of government and president of
parliament‘. In Arabic, it would be ungrammatical if the translator were to keep it as a
definite the for the president. The same is observed for the indefinite determiner phrase in
(10a) below:
(10) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier

Members of Iraq‘s new parliament met on Saturday to vote a new prime
minister and other posts after months of wrangling over candidates.

(c )Trs :al jam‟eeyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeya tandur fi tarsheeh al maliki

t‟qed al jam‟eeyah al wataneeyah al eraqeeyah ( al barlaman) ejtema‟an al youm
al sabt lil musadaqa „la „dad min al manaseb al seyaseeyah fi al daulah bima fiha
akthar hatheh al manaseb etharah lil jadal wa hua manseb raees al hukuma.
In (10a), the indefinite determiner phrase, a new prime minister, in the verb phrase ‗to
vote a new prime minister‟ of the structure [V- D‘ = ‗verb phrase –determinar phrase‘]
has been sustained as an indefinite noun phrase ‫ِح‬ٛ‫ظ اٌسى‬١‫ ِٕصة سئ‬ٛ٘ ٚ (wa hua manseb
raees al hukuma) ‗and he post president the government‘ which literally is ‗the post of
the president in the government‘.
15
Stylistic Changes in Prepositions.
In this section, we will be looking at the changes of styles with respect to the following
three prepositional pharses in the English ST: on Iraq‟s path to democracy, in the hands
of the government and on operations in Baghdad and the translation into Arabic. The
relevant data are as in ( 11) below:
(11) (a) ST: Maliki endorsed as new Iraqi PM

BBC: Saturday 22 April 2006
He offered his congratulations to the Iraqi people and said the day was
a milestone on Iraq‘s path to democracy.
ٗٔ‫ ا‬ٚ ‫ح‬١‫ّمشاط‬٠‫ اٌذ‬ٛ‫ك ٔس‬٠‫ اٌطش‬ٟ‫ؼرثش " أداصا ٘اِا" ف‬٠ ‫ا اْ االذفاق‬١ٔ‫س‬ٛ‫ف‬١ٌ‫ح وا‬٠‫ال‬ٛ‫ ت‬ٛ‫ خطاب اٌماٖ تغاوشإِر‬ٟ‫ػ ف‬ٛ‫ لاي ت‬ٚ
."‫ االخّاع‬ٚ ‫افك‬ٛ‫دغذ اٌر‬٠
(c) Trs: Wa qala bush fi khetab alqah bisakramantu biwilayat kalefurnyah ena
al etefaq y‟tabur enjaz haman fi al tareeq nahu al demoqrateeya wa
enahu yujaseed al tawafuq wa al ejma‟.
Basically, the structures in both the ST and the TT are similar in that in both cases the
prepositions are retained within the general structure of [P-D‘]. There is a difference,
however, in the prepositions that are being used so as to suit the nature of the perception
of the Arabic speakers which is in congruence with Fishman‘s (1972) views that the
nature of language use especially in the repertoire range and network of interactions of
linguistic elements within a society is to a large extent the sociolinguistic reflections of its
speakers.
Stylistic Changes in Conjunctions and Connectives.
In this subsection, we will present a few cases on conjoined structures and structures
conjoined by connectives. First consider the sentences joined by the conjunction and in
(12a) and its translation in (12b):
(33) (a) ST: Syria decries Hariri probe „bias‟

BBC: Saturday, 21 January 2006
In a speech in Damascus, Bashar al Assad said the investigation had
16
reached their conclusions first, and looked for the evidence afterwards.
(b) TT: ٞ‫ش‬٠‫ا ي اٌسش‬١‫ اغر‬ٟ‫ك ف‬١‫ٕرمذ ٌدٕح اٌرسم‬٠ ‫اال عذ‬
.ً١ٌ‫ا تاٌثسث ػٓ اٌذ‬ٚ‫ال ثُ تذا‬ٚ‫ اٌخالصاخ ا‬ٌٝ‫ا ا‬ٍٛ‫ص‬ٛ‫ٓ ذ‬١‫م‬١‫خٗ اال عذ أرماداخ ٌؼًّ اٌٍدٕح لائال اْ اٌّسم‬ٚٚ
(c) Trs:Wa wajaha al asad enteqadat le „amal al lejna qaelan ena al

muhaqeqeen tawasalu ela al khulasat awalan thuma badau bi al bahth
ann al daleel.
The basic structure of the English ST is as in the linear structure in (a‘) while its
corresponding Arabic TT has the structure in (b‘) below:
(a‘) [ […the investigation had reached their conclusion first]

IP‘ IP(1)
[and [looked for the evidence afterwords]]].
CONJ IP(2)
(b) .ً١ٌ‫ا تاٌثسث ػٓ اٌذ‬ٚ‫ال ثُ تذا‬ٚ‫ اٌخالصاخ ا‬ٌٝ‫ا ا‬ٍٛ‫ص‬ٛ‫ٓ ذ‬١‫م‬١‫خٗ أرماداخ ٌؼًّ اٌٍدٕح لائال اْ اٌّسم‬ٚٚ
[ [ …. ena al muhaqeqeen tawasalu ela.al khulasat awalan

IP‘ IP(1) ‗summaries first‘
[ thuma [badau [ bi al bahth „n al daleel]].

CONJ ‗then‘ IP(2) ‗started‘ P
In the above case the conjunction and in the first ST has been translated as ُ‫( ث‬thumma)
‗and‘ (then) in the TT. It would have been acceptable if the translator had translated the
conjunction and literally into TT. This would not have affected the TT.
In the above case, the sequence of the structure is basically similar: [COMP [IP- COMP-
IP]]. In Ghazala‘s (1995) sense, both cases keep the formal style. With respect to
conjoined structures, both English and Arabic keep the formal style. The only difference
has been the fact that different conjunctions are used.
Stylistic Changes Due to Modality.
In this subsection, we examine some English data containing the modals could, would and
will and their corresponding data in Arabic. First we observe the data containing the
modal could in (36a) below:
(13) (a) ST: Iraq PM impasse speaker new delay

BBC: Monday, 17 April 2006
Iraq‘s ambassador to Washington, Samir Sumaidie said a solution to the
deadlock could be found in the next few days.
17
(b) TT: ‫ثا‬٠‫ عرسً لش‬ٞ‫ اصِح اٌدؼفش‬: ٓ‫اؽٕط‬ٚ ٟ‫ ف‬ٟ‫ش اٌؼشال‬١‫اٌغف‬
ُ١٘‫ اتشا‬ٌٟ‫ اٌسا‬ٟ‫صساء اٌؼشال‬ٌٛ‫ظ ا‬١‫ اْ االصِح اٌّرؼٍمح تّغرمثً سئ‬,ٟ‫ذػ‬١ّ‫ش اٌص‬١ّ‫ ع‬, ٓ‫اؽٕط‬ٚ ٜ‫ ٌذ‬ٟ‫ش اٌؼشال‬١‫لاي اٌغف‬
.‫ٍح اٌّمثٍح‬١ٍ‫اَ اٌم‬٠‫ لذ ذسً خالي اال‬ٞ‫اٌدؼفش‬
(c ) al safeer al „raqi fi washinton: azmat al j‟fari satuhal qareeban

qala al safeer al „raqi ladah washinton, sameer al sumeid‟e ena al azmah al
muta‟leeqa bimustaqbal raees al wizara al „raqi al hali ebrahim al j‟fari
qad tuhal khelal al ayam al qaleela al muqbela
The structures of (13a) and (13b) are as in (a‘) and (b‘) respectively:
(a) ST: …a solution to the deadlock could be found in the next few days.
[… [ [a solution ]
IP Spec D‘
[to the deadlock]
P
[ [ could [ be found [in the next few days]]]]]].
I‘ I V P‘
(b) .‫ٍح اٌّمثٍح‬١ٍ‫اَ اٌم‬٠‫ لذ ذسً خالي اال‬ٞ‫ُ اٌدؼفش‬١٘‫اتشا‬

… ebrahim al j‟fari qad tuhal khelal al ayam al qaleela al muqbela
[…[ebrahim al j‟fari ] [ [ qad [ tuhal

Ibrahim al ja‘afari ‗might‘ ‗ solve‘
IP‘ Spec I‘ I V‘
[al ayam [al qaleela [al mauqbela]]]]]]]].

D‘ D‘ D‘
‗today‘ ‗ the little‘ ‗ the next‘
Basically, the structures in (a‘) and (b‘) are similar in the styles in that the modal comes
before the main verb in both English and Arabic. In the next two data, the same pattern is
also observed:
(14) (a) ST: If somehow this got resolved diplomatically that would definitely
take a few dollars off…
(b) TT: .‫الساخ‬ٚ‫ٕضي تغؼش إٌفظ ػذج د‬١‫ فاْ ٘زا تال ؽه ع‬ٟ‫ِاع‬ٚ‫ارا ذُ زً االصِح تؾىً دتا‬ٚ
(c) Trs: wa etha tama hal al azmah bishakel diblumasi, fana hadha bila shak
sayunzel bi se‟r al naft „dat dularat
18
(15) (a) ST: The Shia bloc who took the most votes in Iraq‘s election says it will
form…
(b) TT: …‫طا ٌالئرالف ِغ اٌغٕح‬ٚ‫ح ذضغ ؽش‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١‫ؼ‬١‫ازضاب اٌؾ‬
...ٗ١ٕ‫ٗ اال زضاب اٌغ‬١‫ا ذؾاسن ف‬١ِٛ‫ْ ائرال فا زى‬ٍٛ‫ؾى‬١‫ُ ع‬ٙٔ‫ذ ا‬٠‫ اٌدذ‬ٟ‫ التشٌّاْ اٌؼشال‬ٟ‫ف‬
(c) Trs: ….ahzab al shee‟eya al „raqeeyah tada‟ shurutan lil etelaf m‟a al
sunnah ...enahum sayoushakelun etelafan hukumeyan
The structures of the English ST in (13a-15a) and their corresponding Arabic ST in

(37b-8b) are as in (a‘) and (b‘) respectively:
(a‘) [ [ that [ would [ definietely [ take …]]]]]

[ [ it [ will [ ………… [form …]]]].
IP Spec I‘ Adv V‘
(b‘) TT (i) : ‫ٕضي‬١‫فاْ ٘زا تال ؽه ع‬

… fana hatha bila shak sayunzel…
‗this definitely will+drop‘
P
[ [fana hatha] [ bila shak [ sa [yunzel …]]]]
IP‘ Spec Adv I‘ V‘
TT(ii) : ‫ا‬١ِٛ‫ْ ائرال فا زى‬ٍٛ‫ؾى‬١‫ُ ع‬ٙٔ‫ا‬

...enahum sayoushakelun etelafan hukumeyan...
‗they‘ ‗will + form‘ ‗coalition government‘
[…[enahum [sa [ youshakelun [etelafan hukumeyan...]]]]]

IP Spec I V‘
Relative to the position of the verb, the structures in (a‘) and (b‘) are basically similar in
that in both cases the order is modal- verb, [I‘ –V‘]] in both cases. The only difference is
in the verb morphology. Modals are attached as a prefix to the main verb in Arabic
whereas it is a separate word in English.
Conclusion.
The structures of the English texts and their corresponding Arab translations have been
compared using various techniques: phrase markers in tree configuration, in linear
structures (label-bracketing) and some narrative descriptions. To facilitate our
description, we have chosen transposition as a major procedure in English-Arabic
19
translation. In summary, in the process of translation, significantly there have been
many stylistic changes. Most of these changes are within the realm of syntax (sentences,
clauses and phrases). Some other stylistic changes are due to morphological functions
(tenses and verb morphology).
Reference
Culicover, P. W. (1997). Principles and Parameters: An Introduction to Syntactic
Theory. New York: Oxford: Oxford University Press. U.S.A.
Fishman, J.A. (1972), Sociocultural Organization: Language Constraints and

LanguageReflections, in Language in Sociocultural Change, Essays by Joshua A.
Fishman, pages: 269-286. California: Standford University Press, U.S.A
Ghazala, H. (1995). Translation as Problems and Solutions: A Coursebook for University

Students and Trainee Translators. Beirut: Dar wa Maktabat Al-Hilal. Lebanon.
Hatim, B. (1997). Communication across Cultures: Translation Theory and

Contrastive Text Linguistics. Exeter: University of Exeter Press, U.K.
Vinay, J.P. and Darbelnet, J. (1995). Comparative Stylistic of French and English :
A Methodology for Translation. Amsterdam :John Benjamins, The Netherlands.
20
Stylistic and Syntactic Analysis in English –Arabic Translation: with Reference to
BBC Political News
Abstract
Arabic has some special syntax features which might create complex and confusion
syntax structures. One has to return to the cultural and social backgrounds of the Arabic
language and try to discover how these may effect the process of translating into Arabic.
It is also essential to note that Arabic is a VSO, non-Indo- European language whose
speaker differs in cultural and social behavior from those of the Western Language.
Towards that end, the researcher ‗s objectives will look at (a) the effect of translation
from English into Arabic on the syntactical form (b) whether the changes on the
syntactical form effect on the style of message as well?. The researcher will be used the
Culicover (1997) ‗s ―X‖ bar theory, on the structure of the English-Arabic structure,
Ghazala (1995) ‗s conception on the style of English-Arabic sentence and Hatim (1997)
‘s conception on culture across boundaries. The findings have shown that translating
from English news into Arabic has involved many linguistic forms (conjunctions,
deteminer phrases, and clauses) and stylistic forms (long sentece, and formal style), that
have cultural imports.As suggested by Hatim (1997), these cultural words and linguistc
forms do play important roles in communication among nations and in the process of
translation.
Key Words: syntax, style, message, culture, morphology and translation.
Introduction
Ghazala (1995).
sentences be re-echoed in the Arabic translation (Ghazala, 1995:242).
Ghazala further notes that the style of long sentences is better to be imitated in Arabic
because it has important stylistic functions which are a part of the meaning of the text. He
adds that translating an English long sentence into Arabic long sentences might be less
problematic than breaking it into short sentences (Ghazala, 1995:245).
21
Ghazala also notes that there is a common mistake of changing the passive into the active
made by some Arabic translators who claim that Arabic is an active language, whilst
English is passive (Ghazala, 1995:246). In any case, he adds that this aspect of the
Arabic language is by no means settled as both passive and active styles are used in all
types of Arabic texts. As a consequence, both styles, active and passive, have to be
reflected in Arabic translations to reflect their important functions in the message
(Ghazala, 1995:246).
In terms of redundancy and repetition, Ghazala (1995:252) considers redundancy is a bad

style in translation, since it could dispose the meaning of the translation. He adds that
such style as a long, boring way of expressing meaning, using two, three or more words
instead of one word only, but at the same time it is the translator‘s job to be faithful to the
original text as much as to his job of translation. With respect to repetition, Ghazala
(1995: 252) says that ―this style would rather be rendered into Arabic, thus reflecting the
same effect of the original, and avoiding the problem of artificial variation which might
be hard to accept‖.
Hatim‟s Concepts on Communication Across Cultures.
Hatim (1997: xiii) notes that a careful consideration to a given text means ―…someone
attempts to mediate in communicating its ‗import‘ across both linguistic and cultural
boundries …‖ and such an attempt is ―… one way of making sure that we do not settle
for a partial view of what goes on inside that text.‖. Hence, he suggests that cultural
element plays an important role in communication among nations and in the process of
translation. Hatim has studied texts based on two main elements as follows: (a) the
culture of Western and Islamic- Arab and the second, and (b) the socio-linguistic element
in situation when they are in contact by using texts that people from different cultures can
reach and understand the culture of one another properly (Hatim, 1997:157).
Hatim‘s (1997:157) ideas are to view a text within and across a number of cultural
boundries so as to enable the language user from either of the two cultures in question to
22
operate felicitously within the rhetorical conventions not only of the target culture but
those of his or her own. Among other things, he makes the following observation:
In the regrettable but not common situation of cross-cultural

misunderstandings, which often result in or from a breakdown in
communication, what is at the root of the problem is invariably a set of
misconceptions held by one party about how the other rhetorically
visualize and linguistically realizes of a variety of communicative
objectives. Such notions would then be paraded as truisms about the nature
of the language of those on the other side, its textual norm and its
rhetorical tradition. Hatim (1997:157).
With regards to English and Arabic texts, Hatim (1997:173) identifies two kinds of
audiences that the procedures of the two texts assume: the counter-arguments which are
typically addressed to the skeptical and the through-arguments which assume a
supportive audience.
On the matter of the nature of the occurrence of audiences with respect to text, Hatim
(1997:173) notes the following:
Some texts are going to be more oral than others. While this can certainly
implicate text type, it does not necessarily make orality an exclusive property
of Arabic, English or any other language. Furthermore, some languages
would tend to display a particular preference for this or that strategy, but this
does not make tendency in question. These are merely preferences,
tendencies, trends. For example, Arabic prefers through-argumentation
whereas English orients its rhetorical strategy the other way, towards counter-
argumentation. Hatim (1997: 173).
Hatim‘s more recent views (personal communication) on circumventing the problems of

translating across cultures require the translator to differentiate between three set of facts
in language use: the articfacts, the socio-facts and the mantifacts. The first relates to the
more concrete differences in cultural elements, the second refers to the more abstract
cultural notions within the sphere of socio-cultural interactions while the third refers to
those aspects of content within the realm of world view and pragmatics.
To summarize, this study will take cognizance of Hatim‘s views on communication

across different nations/cultures especially in terms of the three facts mentioned above.
23
This is so because the very data to be dealt with later in Chapters 4 through 7 are
expressions and exponents of two cultures: that of English speakers and that of Arabic
speakers. But, we will invoke Hatim‘s view only compositely and holistically as this
study is not entirely a study relating to the problems of translation due to cultural
differences per se, but rather it is a study of style and message where cultural elements
may contribute to the different message.
The X‟ Theory.
According to Culicover (1997:134) X‘-Theory is a theory of phrase structure; that is a

theory which constitutes a possible phrase in natural language. He adds that within this
theory phrase structure concerns the hierarchical and left-to-right relationships between
syntactic categories. He further suggests that every phrase has a head; certain head take
complements; and such a relationship is characterized by the fact that they are sisters:
each c-commands the other, and they are dominated by the same node, Culicover
(1997:135) as in (1) below where V‘ (verb phrase), V (verb) is the head while NP (noun
phrase) is the complement. Within this theory, as in the diagram in (1) below the V‘, V
and NP are all nodes, and the V and NP nodes are sisters and that V‘ and NP c-
command the other which means between them there exist some grammatical
relationships.
(1) V‘
V NP
He also contends that, ‗An important principle of X‘ Theory ―…is that across syntactic
categories, complements, specifiers, and adjunct bear the same configurational relatioship
to the head.‖ Culicover (1997:136). Further, ―In English…the complement of the head
appears adjacent to it and to the right of it, while the specifier appears to the left.‖
Culicover (1997:136). In other languages the sequence may be the reverse; that is,
24
instead of V-NP as in (1) above like in the case of eat cake for English, it may be V-…-
NP for Arabic akal –Ali- cake ‗Ali ate cake‘. ‫ اٌىؼىح‬ٍٟ‫‗ اوٍح ػ‬ate Ali the cake‘. In the
theory that he proposes, all phrases have the following structure, called the X‘schema,
Culicover (1997: 137) as in (2) below:
(2) X max
X max Adjunct
X max Adjunct
…..
Specifier X‘
X‗ Adjunct
… Adjunct
X‘
X(zero) Complement
(From Culicover: (1997:137)
It can be noted that a complement is sister to X (zero), while an adjunct is adjoined to X‘

and that all branching are binary, (i.e., dual branching), (Culicover, 1997:137). As for
sentences containing a clause (XP) or Inflectional phrase (IP), (Culicover ,1997:143).
25
Data
The data of this investigation comprises 6 political news articles from the BBC (British
Broadcasting News) and their corresponding Arabic translations. The BBC news have
been chosen because they are documents for public consumption in which the readers are
not specialized group of people; instead they are laymen and general news readers. From
the view of their content, these newspaper articles are not of general nature; instead they
are news on political events and happenings in the Arab world (especially the Middle
East). All these articles have been taken from the Internet, since the parallel versions in
Arabic can be accessed easily.
Data Analysis
(1). (a). ST: „ Bin Laden call falls on deaf ears‟
BBC Monday , 24 April 2006

US intelligence believes the audio tape aired by an Arab TV channel is
genuine, making it the fugitive al –Qaeda leader‘s first message since
January.US opposition politicians said it only showed up the Bush
administration ‗s failure to capture Bin Laden.
(b). TT: " َ ‫ٗ ضذ ال عال‬١‫ٗ غشت‬١‫ث‬١ٍ‫تٓ ال دْ " زشب ص‬

‫ٗ اْ ذسشن اٌغشب ٌؼضي‬١ٌ‫ب ا‬ٛ‫ ِٕغ‬ٟ‫ذ‬ٛ‫ً ص‬١‫ ذغد‬ٟ‫ُ اٌما ػذج ف‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫لاي اعاِح تٓ الدْ صػ‬
"َ ‫ زشب ضذ ا ال عال‬ٟ‫ أٗ "ف‬ٟٕ‫ؼ‬٠ ‫اد دج زّاط‬١‫ح تم‬١ٕ١‫ِح اٌفٍغط‬ٛ‫اٌسى‬
( c ). Trs: (ben laden: hareb salebleebyah ded al eslam…)

(Qala osama ben laden z‟eem tandeem al qa‟eda fi tasjeel sawti mansub
eleih
ena taharuk alghrb l „zel al hukuma al filisteenyh biqeyadat hamas y‟ni
enahu fi harb ded al eslm. )
The underlined constituents of the ST in (1a), the fugitive al –Qaeda leader‟s, is given a
syntactic structure in (a‘), its corresponding Arabic translation, ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫(صػ‬z‟eem
tandeem al qa‟eeda), is given the structure in (b‘) below:
26
(a‘) …the fugitive al Qaedah leader… (b‘) ‫ُ اٌما ػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫صػ‬
(…z‟eem tandeem „al qa‟eda…)
N‟ (English) N‟ (Arabic).
Spec. N Adjunct
z‟eem
‗leader‘
D‘ Adjunct
N‘
D N
the fugitive D‘
N Adjunct
tandeem
D‘ Adjunct ‗organizing‘ D‘
al –Qaeda al qa‟edah
N‘
leader
In the above phrase markers, the non-branching node like Adjunct is retained. In the
subsequent representation, following a representation in linguistic convention that non-
branching node deletes itself, only when it is necessary that the Adjunct node will be
represented.
In the above example, it is noticed that the Arabic term ‫( اٌما ػذج‬al-Qaeda) has been
borrowed in the English political news in (1a). The translator has used the same
determiner phrase in the TT in (1b) as evidenced from its transliteration in (1c).
Syntactically, it is also noticed that the same determiner phrase is sandwhiched between
two constituents, the fugitive and leader. As ‫( اٌما ػذج‬al-qa‟eda) is an Arabic determiner
phrase, the translator has retained it in the Arabic news as in (1b‘). As for the phrase al-
Qaeda leader‟s which has the structure [D‘-N‘] as in (a‘) above has changed to ُ١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫صػ‬
‫( اٌما ػذج‬z‟eem tandeem al-qa‟eda) which stylistically is [N-N-D‘] sequence as in (b‘)
above. The structural difference is that the political terms al-Qaeda‟ has been written
after two nouns, namely ُ١‫صػ‬ (z‟eem) ‗leader‘ and ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandem) ‗organizing‘. In
addition, it is noticed that the translator has used the definite article ‫( اي‬al) ‗the‘ to make
the noun definite in both the ST and the TT texts. In addition, it has been noticed that the
lexical adjective word ‗the fugitive‘ in the ST is changed into ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandem)
27
‗organizing‘. These changes in the description of Bin Laden‘s attributes are partly due to
the ideological perspectives the translator might have in his/her mind about Bin Laden.
In terms of Ghazala‘s (1995) ideas on styles, the above syntactic change can be termed as
a formal style as the complex and long sentences have been retained. In other words, in
terms of style in Ghazala‘s sense the sequential syntactic change from ―…the fugitive al-
Qaeda leader‘s…‖ (D‘-D‘-N‘) in English to Arabic ―…‫ُ اٌما ػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( صػ‬z‟eem tandem
al-qa‟eda) …‖ (N-N-D‘) have been kept to a minimum as it only involves a change in
the syntactic position of the noun leader (Arabic ُ١‫( صػ‬z‟eem). In addition, the English
phrase the fugitive al-Qaeda leader‟s is expressed in the possessive (genitive) case while
the Arabic translation ‫ُ اٌما ػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( صػ‬z‟eem tandem al-qa‟eda) is an adjectival
constituents and in an adjective position.
Consider next the English news in (2a) below and its corresponding Arabic translation in
(2b) and its transliteration in (2c) below:
(2) (a) ST: Iraqi Shias state coalition terms.

BBC Saturday, 21 January 2006
The Shias bloc which took the most voter in Iraq‘s election
says it will form a coalition with Sunni groups but only if
they do more to combat the insurgency.
(b) TT: ‫طا ٌالئرالف ِغ اٌغٕح‬ٚ‫ح ذضغ ؽش‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١‫ؼ‬١‫ازضاب اٌؾ‬

‫ذ‬٠‫ اٌدذ‬ٟ‫ التشٌّاْ اٌؼشال‬ٟ‫ْ اوثش ذىرً ف‬ٛ‫رشاع‬٠ ٓ٠ ‫زذ اٌز‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫ اٌؾ‬ٟ‫اػٍٓ صػّاء االئرالف اٌؼشال‬
ٖ‫اَ ٘ز‬١‫ك راٌه ل‬١‫ا ٌرسم‬ٛ‫ُ اؽرشط‬ٕٙ‫ ٌى‬, ٗ١ٕ‫ٗ اال زضاب اٌغ‬١‫ا ذؾاسن ف‬١ِٛ‫ْ ائرال فا زى‬ٍٛ‫ؾى‬١‫ُ ع‬ٙٔ‫ا‬
. ٓ١‫اخٗ ِغ اٌّغٍس‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ذ اوثش ف‬ٙ‫اال زضاب تثزي خ‬
(c ) Trs: a‟lana zua‟ma al-etalaf al-eraqi al-shee‟ee al-muwahad al-

lathina ytarasuna akbar takatul fi al-barlaman al-„raqi al-jadid anahum
sayoushakiluna etelafan hukumeeyan tusharik fih al-ahzab al-suneeyah,
lakinahum eshtaratu li tahqiq thalika qiyam hathih al-ahzab bibathl juhd
akbar fi al-muajaha ma‟ al-musalaheen.
The following tree diagrams in (a‘) to (b‘) in (3) below demonstrate the syntactical
difference:
(3) (a) ST: The Shia bloc …says it will form a coalition with Sunni groups…
28
IP
The [Shias bloc] …says it will form N‘

N‘
Spec N‘
D‘ P‘
a coalition with [ [Sunni] groups…]].

A
(b‘) ٗ١ٕ‫………… اٌغ‬.....‫زذ‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫ اٌؾ‬ٟ‫…… االئرالف اٌؼشال‬..
(a-etalaf al-„iraqi al-shee‟eyah al-muwahad al-suneeiyah…)
[………… ]
IP
a-etalaf al-„raqi [al-shee‟eyah [al-muwahad]]…….. ]

A‘
…..[al-suneeiyah….]
N‘
In the English ST as in (2a), the terms sunni and shia are borrowed from Arabic.
The Arabic translation retains them. However, there is a change of grammatical
category. The word shia is a noun in the ST but is used as an adjective ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫( اٌؾ‬al-shee‟ee)
in the TT; besides, in the ST text The sunni bloc is a global determiner phrase refering to
the whole group while in the Arabic TT the determiner phrase ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫( اٌؾ‬al-shee‟ee) has a
more definitive reference. As for the determiner phrase ٗ١ٕ‫( اٌغ‬as- Suni), it is an adjective
in the ST text but has been translated as a definite noun in the TT text. In addition, the
ST does not show any direct or indirect indication to the existence of the lexical words
‗the united iraqi‘ which refers to the compound ‗the Shia bloc‘. It seems that when the
transaltor paraphrases the ‗Shia bloc‘ into ‫زذ‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫ اٌؾ‬ٟ‫(االئرالف اٌؼشال‬a-etalaf al-„iraqi
al-shee‟eyah al-muwahad: the coalition the iraqi the united), he is likely to want to
inform the readers who are not knowledgeable about the iraqi‘s political groups,
especially the ‗Shia group‘, that their ideology in their party should be united-Iraqis.
29
From Ghazala‘s (1995) views of styles, it is quite apparent that the long sentence style of
the ST has been transfered to the TT. In addition the formal style of the original has been
maintained. The determiner phrase the Shias bloc which in the ST is a subject of the
main clause has shifted its position in the subordinate clause in the Arabic TT. This is
similar to the movement of words (namely fronting) in Ghazala (1995) sense.
(4) (a) ST: „US warns Russia over aid to Iran‟

BBC Wednesday, 19 April 2006.
….said Mr. Burns, the US undersecretary of State…
..... ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫ح اال ِش‬١‫شج اٌخاسخ‬٠‫ص‬ٚ ‫ ٔائة‬, ‫ لاي تشٔض‬ٚ
(c ) Trs: …washington tad‟u rusyah le elgha safqat al sawareegh ela eran

wa hatha nikulas bireez naeeb wazeerat al khareejeyah al amreekiyah
.....
Consider the text …the US undersecretary of state… which has a structure in (a‘) and the
structure of its corresponding Arabic translation in (b‘) below
(a‘) ST: …the US undersecretary of State… (b) ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫ح اال ِش‬١‫شج اٌخاسخ‬٠‫ص‬ٚ ‫ٔائة‬
naaeb wazeerat al khareejeyah al amreekiyah
N‘ N‘
D‘ N‘ Spec N‘
the US
N Adjunct A N
na‟eb wazeerat Adjunct‘
undersecretary P‘ ‗assisting‘ ‗minister‘
D‘
P Adjunct
D N
of N al- kareejeyah Adjunct

state ‗the‘ ‗minister of
foreign affairs‘
D‘
al- amreekiyah.
‗the American‘
30
It is observed that the English phrase the undersecretary of state is a sequence of a
determiner phrase, a noun and a prepositional phrase: [D‘-N-P‘]. In the Arabic
translation, this has changed into ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫اال ِش‬ ‫ح‬١‫شج اٌخاسخ‬٠‫ص‬ٚ ‫( ٔائة‬naeb wazeerat al
khareejeyah al-amreekiyah), a sequence of words containing an adjective, a noun and
two determiner phrases: [A-N-D‘-D‘]. The translator does not literally translate each
element, but has used structural-stylistic changes to create a syntactical and structural
equivalence between the ST text and the TT. The definite article ‫( اي‬al-) ‗the‘ in ‫ح‬١‫( اٌخاسخ‬
al- kharejeeya) ‗the exterior, foreign‘ and ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫‗ اال ِش‬al-amreekiyah‟ ‗the American‘ are
used in determiner phrases (D‘) to define the nouns and to express a shared knowledge
about certain entities. The same corresponding expressions in the ST text is undefined. In
terms of Ghazala‘s (1995) views on style, the structural change in the Arabic TT is in
keeping with a formal style of the ST.
(5) (a) ST: “ Bin Laden call falls on deaf ears‟

‗Our goal is not defending the khartum government but to defend Islam its
land and its people‘, he said. BBC Monday , 24 April 2006
(b) TT: " َ ‫ٗ ضذ ال عال‬١‫ٗ غشت‬١‫ث‬١ٍ‫تٓ ال دْ " زشب ص‬
" ٗ‫ ؽؼث‬ٚ ٗ‫ اسض‬ٚ َ‫ أّا اٌذفاع ػٓ ا ال عال‬ٚ َٛ‫ِح اٌخشط‬ٛ‫ظ اٌذفاع ػٓ زى‬١ٌ ‫ اضاف " اْ ٘ذفٕا‬ٚ
(c) Trs: (bin laden: hareb salebeebyah gharabiyah ded al e„slam)
(wa adafa ena hadafana leis al defa‟ „an hukumat al khartum wa enama al defa‟ „an al
eslam wa ardeh wa sh‟bih.)
We are concerned with the underlined constituents of the texts in (a-c) above. Sentence
(5a) above has the structure as the phrase marker (tree diagram) in (a‘) below while its
Arabic counterpart has the structure in the phrase marker (b‘):
(a‘) ‗Our goal is not defending the khartum government but to defend Islam its land
and its people‘,
31
IP
N‘ [ our goal is not V‘[ defending

the Khartum government]] CONJ‘
Conj IP
but [ …. to defend Islam CONJ‘
Conj IP‘
Ø […its land] CONJ‘
Conj IP‘
and [... its people].
(b‘) ٗ‫ ؽؼث‬ٚ ٗ‫ اسض‬ٚ َ‫ أّا اٌذفاع ػٓ ا ال عال‬ٚ َٛ‫ِح اٌخشط‬ٛ‫ظ اٌذفاع ػٓ زى‬١ٌ ‫اْ ٘ذفٕا‬
(‗ena hadafana leis al defa‟ „an hukumat al khrtum wa enama al defa‟ „an
al eslam wa ardeh wa sh‟bih.)
COMP‘
IP‘
COMP‘
Ena [ hadafa-na [laisa al-defa‟ [an hukuma al khartum ]]]] CONJ‘
N‘ V‘ D‘
‗that our goal not the defence for government the Khartum‘
Conj IP‘
enama
‗but‘
al-defa „an al-eslam CONJ‘

‗the defence for Islam‘
Conj IP‘
wa
‗and‘ [.ardeh CONJ‘]
Conj IP‘
wa [… sh‘bih]
It is noticed that the translator has respected most of the words when translating the ST into
Arabic text. It is noticed also that there is some structural stylistic correspondence between
32
the ST text and the TT text. That is, basically both are similar: one principal clause followed
by a series of conjoined clauses. Hence it is in keeping with a literal translation discussed
under this heading. The only difference is that the Arabic sentence is introduced by a
complementizer ْ‫( ا‬ena) ‗that‘. In addition, there is an obvious introduction of the definite
article ‫( اي‬al) ‗the‘ in some of the Arabic words such as َٛ‫( اٌخشط‬al-Khartum) ‗the Khartum‘,
‫( اٌذفاع‬al-defa‟) „the defence‘, َ‫( ا ال عال‬al eslam) ‗The Islam‘ when these definite articles do
not exist in the corresponding ST text. This is in keeping with Hatim‘s (1997) view that it is
culturally inherent in Arabic to begin a sentence with a clause introducer,‘ a
complementizer‘, and to use a definite article when the content discoursally calls for the use
of the definite article such as in the case of َٛ‫( اٌخشط‬al Khartum) ‗The Khartum‘, ‫( اٌذفاع‬al
defa‟) ‗ the defence‘ to show the sharing of knowledge about entities. In addition, the
translator has translated the whole direct statement in the way it should be in Arabic text.
The full translation is to reflect Bin Laden‘s perspectives in terms of his ideological
thinking towards Islamic nations all over the world, and to make the international Islamic
communities support his ideological campaign againt the West.
In Ghazala‘s (1995) terms both languages keeps the formal style; for example the subject
of the repeated clauses are truncated in both English and Arabic. The idea behind the use
of conjunctions and the deletion of the repeated ‗common‘ subject noun phrases is to
achieve better cohesion among the clauses.

Gaza until the completion of Israel‘s withdrawal from the territory.

A‟lana al raees al filistini mahmud abas enahu sayanqul maktabahu ela ghaza hata
entiha al ensehab al esraeeli min al qata‟.
The following linear structures in (a‘) and (b‘) in racket racketing show a difference
between them:
33

Conclusion
In the process of translation, there have been many stylistic changes. These changes are
within the realm of syntax (sentences, clauses and phrases) . The syntactic comparison has
shown a lot of shifts in style. In particular, these shifts have been contributed mainly by the
fact that English is a SVO language while Arabic is basically a VSO language although
there are also few Arabic sentences that are equational, N-N, structure and SVO structure
especially in stressed (emphatic subject) situations. Consequently, in the process of
translation many English SVO sentences are generally changed into VSO sentences. In
some restricted circumstances (where the subject N is stressed), some SVO either remains
as SVO or simply N-N structure. In complex sentences, there are marked differences in
style. Firstly, Arabic seems to favor commencing the main clause with a VSO pattern that
is preceded by a conjunction ٚ (wa) ‗and ‗ or ٓ‫ ٌى‬ٚ (wa lakin) ‗and/but). The main sentence
is usually followed by conjunction ٚ (wa), ٓ‫ ٌى‬ٚ (walakin) in conjoined structures or by a
complementizer ْ‫ا‬ (aan) ‗that‘ in the case of complex structures with sentence
subordination. Then, they may be followed by a string of noun phrase, determiner phrases
and adjuncts. In contrast, in the English ST, the main clause is almost always of the SVO
structure which is connected to subordinate relative clauses and/complemntation. The
34
subordinate clauses may be followed by adjunct phrases such as the determiner phrase and
the prepositional phrase.
References
35
Tenor in Electronic Media Political Discourse in BBC News: A
Functional Analysis of English-Arabic Translation
Abstract
The study examines tenor in electronic media discourse in BBC News texts. Tenor is one
of the register variables identified by Systemic linguistics. The study looks at how
translators use their social role to relate with their audience in such media discourses as
the Internet. The translator is usually the dominant writer so he determines how his
imaginary audience will respond to his message. Being the sole translator, this increases
his power to control the political discourse. He uses mainly direct and narrative texts to
elicit responses from his imaginary reader. Whichever electronic media used, the
personal tenor of the discourse is that of the translator as the knower/expert, while it has
the pragmatic force of persuasion, exhortation and challenge for the reader.
Introduction
This study focuses on a form of political discourse, which is channeled through the
electronic media. It looks at one of the three variables of situational features (identified
by Halliday (1978: 32) that determine registers – tenor (the two others being field and
mode). The data for this study was drawn from BBC News by the Internet. All of the
English original messages (ST) were rendered in Arabic. The major focus in the analysis
is the role structure into which the participants in the discourse fit and how this
determined how they made and interpret meaning in the political discourse.
This study presents a study of the Arabic translation of English news from the view of the
functions of the news texts especially in terms of field, tenor and mode as conceptualized
in Halliday and Hasan (1985). This study also considers the texts in terms of their
communicative functions as viewed in Hatim (1997) and in terms of Fishman‘s (1972)
sociolinguistic view that language is to a large extent a reflection of the society which
uses it. It aims to answer the research question : ―What is the extent of the sustenance of
the messages in the Arabic translation in terms of field, tenor and mode as well as in
terms of the communicative and societal functions as compared to the same terms in the
original messages of the ST?
36
A comparative method will be adopted paying attention to the context of situations,
namely field, tenor and mode, its communicative functions and how it fits the society
which uses it. The differences and similarities of grammatical features, texture, structure
and generic features representing the textual meaning of the text will be examined.
Towards that end, we have chosen eleven examples of English BBC news and their
corresponding Arabic translation. This study will analyze 4 types of data and their Arabic
translations in terms of field, tenor and mode, since those article have taken from BBC
News texts by the Internet
Functional Analysis Model.
Halliday and Hasan‘s theory of functions (1985), relates to the stylistic, sociolinguistic
and rhetorical aspects of language. They are more general and at the same time more
restrictive in their theory of functions. They are more general in the sense that they
suggest three functional categories of language: the ideational (i.e., experiential), the
interpersonal and the textual. They are more restrictive in the sense that their explanation
of the systematic realization of the context of situation is confined to three, namely, field,
tenor and mode, through the three functional components of the semantic system
mentioned above respectively.
In the ideational function, Halliday and Hasan‘s theory relies on and departs from the text
to detect the real meaning. It must refer to our experience of the real world. For them, the
interpersonal meaning to the language functions as a way of acting, a progression from
the semantic meaning to the pragmatic one and to text as a communicative intercourse
vehicle. As for the textual meaning of the text, they recourse to grammatical features,
texture, structure and generic features of language.
In this study, we will focus our analysis of the messages of the Arabic translation of
English news only on the three realization of the context of situation, namely field, tenor
and mode. The term field refers to "…what is happening, to the nature of the social action
that is taking place, while tenor has to do with who are taking part in the transaction as
well as the nature of the participants, their status and roles, and mode concerns with
37
"…what it is that the participants [of a transaction] are expecting language to do for them
in that situation." Halliday and Hasan (1985:12).
Tenor in discourse
1.The Fugitive al-Qaeda Leader’s.
In this section, we shall examine the phrase, the fugitive al-Qaedah leader‟s, in terms of
field, tenor and mode.
Consider now Table 1.1 below:
Table 1.1 The Field of “the fugitive al Qaeda leader’s”.

ST Bin Laden call falls on deaf ears…
US intelligence believes the Audio tape aired by an Arab TV channel is genuine
making it the fugitive al-Qaeda leader‘s first message since January.
TT ....ٗ١ٌ‫ب ا‬ٛ‫ ِٕغ‬ٟ‫ذ‬ٛ‫ً ص‬١‫ ذغد‬ٟ‫ُ اٌماػذج ف‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫لاي اعاِح تٓ الدْ صػ‬
Trs Qala osama bin laden za‟eem tandeem al-qa‟eda fi tasjeel sauti mansub eleih….
Glosses said Osama bin Laden leader organizing al qaeda in sound recorder.
Field in the fugitive al-qaeda leader‘s

ST
Field in za‟eem tandem al-qa‟eda ‗leader organizing al qaedah‘ . The translator has
TT replaced the lexical word ‗the fugitive‘ into tandeem ‗organizing‘.
Quality
Perce
of Perceptually, the BBC sees Bin Laden as a fugitive leader of the al-Qaeda. In an
message. indirect sense this is meritorious position. In the eyes of some Arabs, far from
being a fugitive, he is generally considered as an able person who is highly
respected and capable of managing and spearheading his organization. Thus while
the focus is the same, i.e., in Bin Laden being a leader, the emphasis is different.
The West sees him as a fugitive, while some Arabs see him as one who is capable
of handling his organization well. Hence, it is a semi-literal translation.
In Table 6.1, we are concerned with the phrase the fugitive al-Qaeda leader‟s in the ST
and its corresponding Arabic translation (underlined), and the impact it has upon the
perception of the Arabic news readers. It is noticed that the field of the ST regards Bin
Laden as a fugitive which is evidenced from the noun phrase the fugitive al-Qaeda
leader‟s. It has been translated into Arabic as ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( صػ‬za‟eem tandeem al-
qa‟eda) ‗leader organizing al-qa‘eda‘, which is also a noun phrase describing Bin
Laden‘s merits. That is, the translator has replaced the lexical word the fugitive of the ST
with the word ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandem) ‗organizing‘ to reflect the general perception of the Arab
38
readers upon Bin Laden‘s character as one who is highly esteemed, respectable and
acceptable in the Arab society. In the sense that the meritorious leadership quality of Bin
Laden in the ST is sustained in the corresponding Arabic TT, in that the focus of the
message remains the same while the emphasis has shifted from regarding him as a
fugitive to one who is capable in putting his organization well-placed. In these respects
the translation is not a fully literal translation but rather a semi-literal one.
The English ST is describing a field pertaining to a political matter. The phrase the
fugitive al Qaeda leader is used to describe Bin Laden as a leader of an organization
with the enemy is in hot pursuit. The repetitive and continuous use of the nouns to
describe him is evidently a way of emphasizing the seriousness of the West in perceiving
his characters in the world of the media. In this respect, the translator has attempted to
emulate that kind of portrayal by having a similar repetitive technique in the Arabic
version: ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( صػ‬za‟eem tandeem al-qa‟eda) ‗leader organizing al-qa‟eda‘.
However, although the focus is the same, namely Bin Laden being a leader, the emphasis
in the ST and the TT is somewhat different. In the ST, he is being conveyed as a fugitive
leader, while in the TT, he is seen as a well-organized leader. The fugitive (i.e., negative
connotation) part of the story has been suppressed. Such an approach where the translator
has empathized the readers‘ perception of Bin Laden can be seen as befitting the Arab
societal-cultural milieu only when we fall back on Hatim‘s (1997) view of translating
across different cultures or nations; we have to be seen as communicating in that new
cultural setting.
Also, in the new context of this TT and bearing in mind the field of the discourse, another
explanation why the translator acts the way he does must be considered; that is, from the
metaphorical use of the word al-Qaeda. The original message does not change the name
of al-Qaeda. In the Arab world, al-Qaeda is not just any organization, it is more than
that; for example, metaphorically al-Qaeda in the TT has represented Bin Laden ‗s
foundation or Bin Laden‘s ideology in which no negative quality should be attached to it.
Next, we shall reconsider the same data as in Table 1.1 above, but we do so now in terms
of the tenor of the text as represented in Table 1.2 below:
Table 1.2 The Tenor of “the fugitive al Qaeda leader’s”.
39
ST Bin Laden call falls on deaf ears
making it the fugitive al-qaeda leader‘s first message since January.
TT ....ٗ١ٌ‫ب ا‬ٛ‫ ِٕغ‬ٟ‫ذ‬ٛ‫ً ص‬١‫ ذغد‬ٟ‫ُ اٌماػذج ف‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫لاي اعاِح تٓ الدْ صػ‬
Trs Qala Osama bin Laden za‟eem tandem al-qa‟eda fi tasjeel sauti mansub eleih….
Glosses said Osama bin Laden leader organizing al qa‘eda in sound recorder.
Tenor of the fugitive al-Qaeda leader‘, the writer has characterized Bin Laden as a fugitive
ST
Tenor in za‟eem tandem al-qa‟eda , the translator has characterized Bin Laden as an
TT individual capable or organizing things well. His role as a fugitive is eliminated.
Quality Semi-liteteral translation
In the above Table, we still focus on the underlined constituents. It is noticed that the
tenor of the ST is one in which Bin Laden is conveyed as the fugitive al-Qaeda leader.
This functional role of Bin Laden has been translated into ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( صػ‬za‟eem
tandem al-qa‟eda) ‗leader organizing al-qa‟eda‟ , which is also reflecting Bin Laden‘s
merits and ideology . Here, the translator has changed the character of Bin Laden from
being portrayed as a fugitive in the ST to an individual who is in the Arab world as a very
capable individual in leading and organizing something. In the eyes of the translator,
changing this role and character of Bin Ladin is a way of making the TT more acceptable
to the Arab society. That is, while the participant remains Bin Ladin, his role has
certainly been seen positively. Also, while the ST sees the negative quality of Bin Laden
as a fugitive, the translator stresses his positive quality and role of an organizer to the
Arabic news readers. Hence from the viewpoint of his role, the original message is only
partially retained. Therefore, it is a semi-literal translation.
Finally, we shall see the same text in terms of its mode; that is, the nature and purposes of
the linguistic expressions. We present it as in Table 1.3 below:
Table 1.3 The Mode of „the fugitive al Qaeda leader’s”
making it the fugitive al-Qaeda leader‘s first message since January.
TT ...ٗ١ٌ‫ب ا‬ٛ‫ ِٕغ‬ٟ‫ذ‬ٛ‫ً ص‬١‫ ذغد‬ٟ‫ُ اٌماػذج ف‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫لاي اعاِح تٓ الدْ صػ‬
.
Trs Qala Osama bin laden za‟eem tandem al-qa‟eda fi tasjeel sauti mansub eleih….
Glosses said Osama bin Laden leader organizing al qaeda in sound recorder.
40
Mode in the fugitive al-Qaeda leader‘s, is used in a declarative sentence, and the function of
ST the message is thematic.
Mode in ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫ ( صػ‬za‟eem tandem al-qa‟eda) ‗leader organizing al qaeda‘; the word
TT ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandem) ‗organizing‘ suggests skillful character and elevate his position.
Quality The message changes somewhat; hence, it is a semi-literal translation.
The phrase, the fugitive al Qaeda leader‟s, has been expressed in a declarative sentence.
This implies that the speech function of the original message is thematic with a purpose
such as announcing the negative character of Bin Laden. That is, Bin Laden being a
fugitive and leader of the Al –Qaeda organization. Towards that end, the writer of the ST
describes Bin Laden in a declarative statement in a series of cohesive nouns as fugitive, al
Qaeda, leader. Such a structural schematization conveys a proposition of intense in the
original message to the ST reader. As evidence from the opening phrase ْ‫لاي اعاِح تٓ الد‬
(Qala Osama bin laden) ‗Said Osama Bin Laden‘, the same technique of a declarative
sentence as well as word repetition have been employed by the Arabic translator; but
instead of choosing an Arabic equivalent of fugitive, he has chosen the word ُ١‫ذٕض‬
(tandem) ‗organizing‘. By so doing while he has been able to maintain the intensity of the
original message, simulteneously he was creating a new purpose, namely to shift the
emphasis to the positive quality of Bin Laden which is the ability to organize things. In
this sense, the output is a semi-literal translation. In terms of the sociolinguistic views of
Fishman (1972), here the translator‘s choice of linguistic terms is merely portraying Bin
Laden as he is naturally seen by the Arabs in the Arab world.
To summarize up this section, from the perspective of field, tenor and mode, it is
observed that the Arabic translation of the English phrase the fugitive al Qaeda leader‟s
does not fit squarely into the term literal translation as within the similarities there is still
some degree of difference of information between the ST and the TT. Hence, we have
suggested a new term, semi-literal translation.
2. Parliamentary Speaker.
In this section, we shall examine the phrase, parliamentary speaker, in terms of field,
tenor and mode. We will consider Table 2.1 below:
41
Table 2.1 The Field of “parliamentary speaker”.
ST Maliki endorsed as new Iraq PM
Maliki also gave the post of Parliamentary speaker to Mahmood AL mashhadani, a
Sunni Arab.
TT ....‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫غا ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫ سئ‬ٟٕ‫ ع‬ٛ٘ ٚ ٟٔ‫ذا‬ٙ‫د اٌّؾ‬ّٛ‫ش ِس‬١‫اخر‬
.
Trs Ukhteera mahmood al-mashadani wa huwa sunni raeesan lil-jam‟eeyah al-
wataneeyah…
Glosses Chosen Mahmood Mashadani and he Sunni president for the association the
nationalism.
Field in Parliamentary speaker , the field is specified to two lexical words only, but still
ST indicating an important political event in the appointment of a principal political
office to a Sunni Arab.
Field in ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫غا ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫ سئ‬ٟٕ‫ ع‬ٛ٘ ٚ (wa huwa raeesan lil-jam‟eeyah al-wataneeyah)
TT ‗president for the association the nationalism‘. The field has been extended to
include a broader scope of a ‗nation‘ and ‗president‘ as well as ‗association‘.
Quality An overtranslation
In the above data in Table 6.4, we are concerned with the underlined constituents only. It
is noticed that the field of the ST is the appointment of a parliamentary speaker. In the
perception of the Arabic translator befitting the socio-cultural milieu of the Arab readers,
this event has been extended as the appointment of ‫غا‬١‫( سئ‬raesan) ‗president‘, ‫ح‬١‫( ٌٍدّؼ‬lil
al jam‟eeyah) ‗the association‘ and ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫( ا‬al wataneeyah) ‗the nationalism‘, which is
also a noun phrase describing Mashhadani‘s political post. As a consequence, the
translator has widened the field of the ST the nominal parliamentary speaker to nouns. In
addition, surrounding the appointment of a Parliamentary Speaker, the original message
has been elaborated to include a detail information about the nominated candidate. To the
name of Mahmood Al- Mashhadani, the writer has also provided his religious sector,
Sunni, and his race, Arab suggesting the exhaustiveness of the announcement of
Mashhadani‘s appointment in the political media. Although the same range of
information is found in the TT, noticeably it has been given a greater emphasis on the
appointment by virtue of the fact that the political terms such as ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫( ٌٍدّؼ‬lil-
jam‟eeyah al-wataneeyah) ‗the association the nationalism‘ encompass a greater scope of
an association and nation. Taken as a whole, the TT is an overtranslation of the ST.
42
Next, we will reconsider the same data in Table 2.2 above but will do so now in terms of
the tenor of the text as represented in Table 2.2 below:
Table 2.2 The Tenor on “parliamentary speaker”.

ST Maliki endorsed as new Iraq PM
Maliki also gave the post of Parliamentary speaker to Mahmood AL Mashhadani, a
Sunni Arab.
.
wataneeyah…
Glosses Chosen Mahmood Mashadani and he Sunni president for the association the
nationalism.
Tenor in Parliamentary speaker , the tenor has referred to the specific role of the participant
ST ‗Mahmood Mashadani ‘ in the process of interaction policy.
Tenor in raeesan lil-jam‟eeyah al-wataneeyah (president for the association the

TT nationalism). The translator has described Mashhadan‘s post as president of the
national society to the readership of the TL text.
In the ST the participant is mentioned as Mahmood AL Mashhadani who is a Sunni Arab. The
same range of information has been well translated in the Arabic TT as ٟٕ‫ ع‬ٛ٘ ٚ ٟٔ‫ذا‬ٙ‫د اٌّؾ‬ّٛ‫ِس‬
(mahmood al-mashhadani wa huwa sunni) ‗Mahmood Mashhadani and he (is a) Sunni‘. As we
move further to see his role, however, there is a difference in the way it is perceived in the ST to
that one that is perceived in the TT. In the TT, Mahmood AL Mashhadani has been seen not
merely as a person whose function is within the confine of parliament, but more than that,
his role encompasses more globally within a nation. It is a perception that is most natural
within the Arab socio-cultural context. As a consequence, the translator has painted a
broader concept to the new political role of Mahmood Al Mashhadani in the TT compared
to the information in the ST. Therefore, it is a case of overtranslation.
We move on to reconsider the data in table 2.3 above in term of its mode as seen
presented in table 2.3 below:
43
Table 2.3 The Mode on “parliamentary speaker”.
ST Maliki endorsed as new Iraq PM.
Maliki also gave the post of Parliamentary speaker to Mahmood AL mashhadani, a
Sunni Arab.
.
wataneeyah…
Glosses Chosen Mahmood Mashadani and he Sunni president for the

association the nationalism.
Mode in Parliamentary speaker , the original message is a declarative message

ST
Mode in ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫غا ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫سئ‬, (president for the association the nationalism.). Expressed in a
TT declarative sentence to inform the TL reader about the appointment of a political
post from among the Arab Sunni nationals.
Here, the declarative sentence has a purpose to inform the readers of an important
appointment to a political office. The office is parliamentary speaker. The personality is
Mahmood Mashadani. There is an additional information, namely that he is an Arab who
is a Sunni. The Arabic version also comprises a declarative sentence whose purpose is
also to inform. In so far as the personality and the appointment to a political office are
concerned, the Arab TT contains the same information. There is a difference, however, in
the nature of noun that is being declared. While the ST declares it as a simple post of a
parliamentary speaker, the TT text declares much more than that. It declares a position
that assumes three-in-one post ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫غا ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫( سئ‬raeesan lil-jam‟eeyah al-wataneeyah)
‗president for the association the nationalism‘ which, in the sense of Fishman (1972), is a
reflection of the sociolinguistic and cultural perception of the Arab speakers in Iraq.
Hence, from the perspective of the mode of the TT, it is an overtranslation.
In summary, seen from the perspective of field, tenor and mode, the Arabic translation of
the English phrase parliamentary speaker is a case of overtranslation.
44
3 Traders.
In this section, we shall examine the translation of the English word, trades, to Arabic in
terms of field, tenor and mode. First, we consider the Table 3.1 below:
Table 3.1 The Field of “traders”.
ST Iran fears drive oil to new high
But traders say that in the short term the price could rise as high as 75 per barrel.
TT ‫الس‬ٚ‫ د‬57 ‫ثا عؼش‬٠‫ص ذمش‬ٚ‫ردا‬٠ ً‫ذ تؾى‬٠‫ ا الذداٖ اٌّض‬ٟ‫ذفغ ا ال عؼاس ف‬١‫ذش ع‬ٛ‫ْ اْ اعرّشاس اٌر‬ٍٍٛ‫ ِس‬ٜ‫ش‬٠ ٚ
. ً١ِ‫ٌٍثش‬
Trs Wa yara muhalilun ana estemrar al-tawatr sa yadf‟ al-as‟ar fi al-etijah al-mazeed
bishikel yatagawiz taqreeban s‟r 75 dular lil barmil
Glosses And analysts see that continuing the tension will push the prices in the high
direction which access 75 dollars per barrel.
Field in Selling and buying oil; its prices are buoyant; it creates fears among buyers and
ST sellers.
Field in ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) (a) ‗a group of people analyzing the oil crisis‘ or (b) ‗ general
TT analysts‘
Quality An ambiguous translation
With respect to the English word traders in the above text, it concerns with the activities
of buying and selling oil, the prices are buoyant and there is a continuing fear of the
rising price. It has been translated as ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘. In the first reading of
the TT, this information is also obtained. However, in the absence of the word ‫( إٌفظ‬al
naft) ‗the oil‘ in the context of situation, when the word ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘ is
considered in a broader scope, the word ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) may have a second
interpretation, namely that of the analysts in general. Due to these two possibilities, the
translator‘s choice of the word ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun), although not incorrect, is somewhat
inappropriate and it has made the TT potentially ambiguous. Hence, it is an ambiguous
translation.
From the perspective of the tenor of the text of the word traders, we will present the data
as in Table 3.2 below:
45
Table 3.2 The Tenor of “traders”
TT . ً١ِ‫الس ٌٍثش‬ٚ‫ د‬57 ‫ثا عؼش‬٠‫ص ذمش‬ٚ‫ردا‬٠ ً‫ذ تؾى‬٠‫ ا الذداٖ اٌّض‬ٟ‫ذفغ ا ال عؼاس ف‬١‫ذش ع‬ٛ‫ اْ اعرّشاس اٌر‬ٜ‫ش‬٠ ٚ
direction which access 75 per barrel.
Tenor in traders refer to people who deal in oil transactions such as oil producers, agents and
ST buyers.
Tenor in ٍٍْٛ‫ ِس‬, : two possibilities: (a) oil traders and (b) analysts in general.
TT
In the above data, it is noticed that the tenor of the ST contains the lexical plural noun
traders which in a business society can possibly refers to business people who usually
deal in oil transactions such as oil producers, agents, buyers and sellers. The favorite
reading of the Arabic TT ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘ also conveys these range of
participants. However, due to another possibility of a wider range of usages of the Arabic
word in a wider spectrum, various repertoires and networks of sociolinguistic
communication in Arab society in the sense of Fishman (1972), it may also have an
additional, though less favorite, reading of a ‗general analyst‘. Hence from the
perspective of the tenor of the Arabic text, there is a possibility of the Arabic translation
being ambiguous.
We move on to reconsider the same data from the perspective of the mode of the text as
presented in Table 3.3 below:
Table 3.3 The Mode of “traders”.
TT ‫الس‬ٚ‫ د‬57 ‫ثا عؼش‬٠‫ص ذمش‬ٚ‫ردا‬٠ ً‫ذ تؾى‬٠‫ ا الذداٖ اٌّض‬ٟ‫ذفغ ا ال عؼاس ف‬١‫ذش ع‬ٛ‫ْ اْ اعرّشاس اٌر‬ٍٍٛ‫ ِس‬ٜ‫ش‬٠ ٚ
. ً١ِ‫ٌٍثش‬
46
direction which access 75 per barrel.
Mode in Traders, is the head of the text and precedes by a lexical word; text opposition but
ST expresses positives sense.
Mode in ٍٍْٛ‫ ِس‬is the head of the text and preceded by a lexical word; the additive
TT conjunction ٚ (wa) ‗and‘ confirms the availability of the original information; but its
occurrence with other words serves a possible duality of meaning (a) traders and
(b) analysts.
By virtue of the sentential conjunction but, the mode of the context of situation of the
language of the ST is expressed in a contrastive sense giving rise to a declarative-
contrastive meaning. In another words, due to the fear of Iran, the oil traders hold the
negative view of the price of oil to keep on increasing. In terms of mode, the usage of
the word traders in the context of ‗…drive oil to new high‘ can only positively refer to
people who deals in oil business and handlers of oil. In the case of the Arabic TT, the
usage of the conjunction ٚ (wa) ‗and‘ suggests the first reading holds true; however, its
usage together with the word ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘ in the context of situation
where the word ‫( إٌفظ‬al naft) ‗the oil‘ is not also used, may give rise to another
interpretation, namely that of ‗the analysts on matters other than oil‘. That is, an idea that
is not conveying the original sense and meaning of the original message. In this sense, the
translation is an ambiguous translation.
4. Have reduced the number of weapons.
In this section, will examine the verb phrase …have reduced the number of weapons‟
within its context of situation in terms of field, tenor and mode. Consider the data in
Table 4.1 where it presents the verb phrase in terms of field.
Table 4.1 The Field of the verb phrase, „…have reduced the number of weapons’.
ST Iraq tribe ‗taking on Al Qaeda‘
They set up the salvation council for Anbar and claim to have reduced the number
of weapons and foreign fighter coming into this area.
TT ‫ٓ اال‬١ٍ‫ اٌّماذ‬ٚ ‫ خفض ػذد االعٍسح‬ٟ‫ا عاّ٘د ف‬ٙٔ‫ صػّد ا‬ٚ "‫ اعغد ٘زٖ اٌؼؾائش "ِدٍظ أمار اال ٔثاس‬ٚ
.‫ ٘زٖ إٌّطمح‬ٟ‫خأة ف‬
Trs Wa asasat hatheh al-‟shar majlis enqath al-anbar wa za‟amat anaha sahamat fi
47
khefd ‟dad al-asleha wa al-muqatileen al-ajaneb fi hathih al-mantaqa.
Glosses And these tribes established ‗AL anbar rescue committee‘ and claimed that she (AL
anbar rescue committee‘) participated in reduce number of the weapons and the
foreign fighters in this area.
Field in have reduced: infighting took place due to the supply of weapons and the presence
ST of foreign fighters; the weapons and foreign fighters have been reduced.
Field in ‫خفض‬, (khefd) ‗reduced‘: it covers the same events as in the ST above, but at the
TT same time, it sets them out in the past tense.
Quality In terms of a wrong time frame, it is an incorrect translation
In the above data, the field of the English ST is about the political events in Iraq at a
certain point. These events are set out in the present perfect tense. These are the setting
up of the salvation council for Anbar and the reduction of weapons and foreign fighters.
The same political situations in Anbar city, however, are set out in the past tense in the
Arabic ST, namely the usage of the verb ‫( خفض‬khefd) ‗reduced‘. As a consequence, the
translator has perceived the message somewhat differently than that found in the TT. That
is, he sees them as completed events. Thus, in term of field there is a dislocation of time
frame from present perfect to a past tense and, therefore, grammatically the output is an
incorrect translation.
We will now reconsider the same data above in terms of its tenor of the situation as set
out in Table 4.2 below. Here, we will be interested as to the identity and nature of the
participants.
Table 4.2 The Tenor of the verb phrase‟ “…have reduced the number of weapons”
khefd ‟dad al-asleha wa al-muqatileen al-ajaneb fi hathih al-mantaqa.
48
Tenor in ‗have reduced‘: the weapons and foreign fighters, the rescue committee, people of
ST Anbar city, weapons and the foreign fighters are participants; the reduction is
ongoing.
Tenor in ‫( خفض‬reduce), the same participants are found in the TT; there is a difference ,
TT however, in the number of those participating and the fact that the execution of
reduction was completed.
Quality While the ST talks about a process of reduction that is ongoing, the reduction of the
participants is regarded as complete in the TT; hence, it is an incorrect translation.
In the above data, the scope and nature of the participants are the same in the ST and the
TT. These are the tribes, the people of Anbar city, the committee, the weapons and the
fighters. What is different between the two texts is the timing and the manner of the
reduction of some of the participants. In the ST, the reduction is an ongoing process and
nearing completion; but the usage of the past tense in ‫( خفض‬khefd) ‗reduced‘ suggests that
the translator is not interested in what has gone before, but rather he is more focused on
the fact that the reduction of weapons and fighters were completed. As a consequence in
terms of its mode of situation, the translator has given an incorrect translation.
Now we move on to reconsider the same text from the perfective of the mode of situation
as in Table 4.3 below:
Table 4.4 The Mode of the verb phrase‟ “…have reduced the number of weapons”
a‟dad al-asleha wa al-muqatileen al-ajaneb fi hathih al-mantaqa.
Mode in have reduced; the declarative conjoined structures express process of action to
ST reduce weapons by the participants that is almost completed.
Mode in ‫( خفض‬khefd) ‗reduced‘. The declarative expression of conjoined clauses captures

TT the same theme which is to reduce weapons; but it perceives the action as fully
completed.
Quality An incorrect translation.
49
The ST in the above table is set in a conjoined declarative sentence putting together a
number of participants and events. Its declarative purpose is to express a thematic sense
that action has been taken to reduce the number of weapons and that the process is almost
completed. In the Arabic version, however, while the same declarative and conjoined
structures are used to put together all the participants, and thematically to report an action
of weapons reduction, the translator sees the action as only having been fully completed.
There is a shift in focus. May be this is the way the action is naturally seen from the
perspective of the Arabic language. If so, this is in congruent with Fishman‘s (1972)
view that linguistic expressions are reflections of the perceptions of its speakers about
their surroundings. Therefore, although the mode of the situation of the original ST
message, have reduced, has been changed to a past tense in the Arabic TT, the Arab
readers still find it of some standard and readable form. Nonetheless, the fact remains
that literally the output shows an incorrect translation.
Conclusion.
The study has looked at Halliday and Hasan (1985) views on field, mode and tenor and
their application on the messages in a text in particular as they relate to the translation of
the BBC political news into Arabic. The purpose has been to seek the answers to a
research question stated at the onset of this paper. Towards that end, we have considered
separately four different BBC English texts on political news in which each has been
examined from the perspective of field, tenor and mode of situation as conceptualized by
Halliday and Hasan (1985). We also have considered, wherever appropriate, the
relevance of the ideas of Hatim (1997) and Fishman (1972) in our analysis.
a) Hallidays elements (field, tenor and mode) have helped to facilitate us to view the
messages in both the ST and the TT in a different dimension. In this paper, we have been
able to see the texts through the dynamic functioning of the linguistic elements in three
separate perspectives: its field which focuses on the nature of the events, its tenor which
looks at the participants and their status and roles in the social actions, and its mode
which considers the expressive aspects of the language use. Seen from these different
angles, Halliday‘s elements have served as complementary instruments in our
50
examination of the nature and extent of the sustenance of messages in the translation of
the BBC political news into Arabic.
(b) Theoretically the field, tenor and mode have been useful in the examination of the
data from the perspective of events, participants and language; but it does not do as well
in the examination of the message in terms of the hidden cultural elements and ideology
that may exist in a text.
From the four texts that have been examined, it is also found that the translators seem to
have been keen to use a language, which can be understood by different types of social
classes. In other words, there have attempted to pitch the language of the TT to one
standard that would be readable by the masses for wider readability. Towards that end,
one case has been ambiguously translated while another receives an ―incorrect‖
representation (translation). In this regard, Hatim‘s (1997) views on communication
across different cultures and nations in translation studies, and Fishman‘s (1972)
sociolinguistic concepts that language to a large extent is a reflection of the society which
uses it, have served as useful tools in understanding more clearly the nature of the ST and
the TT as well as the translation problems. In particular, Hatim‘s ideas has helped us
understand the data (both the ST and the TT) better especially in terms of us being more
careful in our examination of the data as different lexical words/phrases/clauses can have
different connotations in different nations/cultures. Against such difficult backgrounds, in
general, we find the translators have done fairly well; this is so because, apart form the
few cases of overtranslation, over all their translation outputs are noticeably acceptable to
a wide circle of readers who come from different social classes, educational and cultural
backgrounds.
References
Fishman, J.A. (1972), Sociocultural Organization: Language Constraints and
51
Halliday M.A. K and R. Hasan (1985). Language, Context and Text: Aspects of
Language in a Social-Semiotic Perspective. Waurn Ponds, Victoria: Deakin
University Press, Berlin.
Halliday, M.A. K. (1978). Language as Social Semiotic: The Social Interpretation of
Language and Meaning.Bristol: Edward Arnold Ltd. London, U.K.
52
STYLISTIC ASPECTS IN ENGLISH AND ARABIC TRANSLATED
POLITICAL TEXTS: A CONTRASTIVE STUDY
Abstract
The study aims at stylistically comparing selected excerpts of contemporary Arabic and
English news with their respective translations. A news text is randomly chosen,
compared with the translated text and analyzed in terms of lexical, syntactic and textual
structure. The purpose is to identify and explain a number of general rules describing
consistent patterns of stylistic change which occur during translation of political news
work from English to Arabic.
Introduction
The study of translation is based on implicit assumptions drawn from both the
universalist and the relativist theories of language. The very nature of translation
presupposes the existence of certain universal parameters which render all languages
translatable. It also acknowledges that because of certain idiosyncratic elements in each
language, a perfect translation is ultimately impossible.
According to Steiner (1975: 149):
The relativists' position carried to its logical conclusion holds that no complete acts of
translation between different semantic fields are possible. That all translations are
approximate and antologically reductive of meaning. The matrix of feeling and
assocative context which energizes usage in any given tongue can be transferred into
another idiom only partly and by virtue of periphrastic and metaphrastic manoeuvres
which inevitably downgrade the intensity, the evocative means, and the formal
autonomy of the original. Poets have often felt this.
A universal grammar will affirm the contrary, the intertranslatability of all languages.
The fact that no closed speech has been found, none that native informants and foreign
learners cannot comprehend and transfer, constitutes one of the strongest evidence in
support of universalists.
The issue of equivalence is the main key in the study of translation of English-Arabic
news in general and the translation of political work in particular. Catford (1965) places
53
special emphasis on the situational element in translation equivalence. He argues that
both SL and TL texts must be relatable to the functionally relevant features of the
situation to achieve translation equivalence. He also points to the concept of
untranslatability of literary works. Catford believes that certain parts of a text are left
untranslated because they are either untranslatable, or meant to give a local flavor to the
translation.
Nida (1964) talks about the reproduction of the SL message by the closest equivalent in
the TL, thus introducing Dynamic Equivalence or Functional Equivalence (Waard and
Nida 1982) in translating. Consequently, preservation of the message rather than
conversion of the form of the utterance is targeted in translating.Lefevere (1975) stresses
the role of communicative value in literary translation. By this term he means the ability
of the translator to measure the time-place-tradition elements found in both SL and TL.
The importance of the study of comparative translations stems from the fact that stylistic
differences in the choice of lexis and grammatical categories constitute the difference
between culture and thought. Political translation presupposes commitment on the part of
the translator to create the style of the author, thus consistent stylistic deviations from the
source text must result from their linguistic differences and the differences which the
translators have to account for.
Data Analysis
This study aims to look into two political texts randomly selected from two translated
English and Arabic news; The BBC News and Their Arabic versions. The study
compares the translation with the original text to highlight the differences in the stylistic
choices of vocabulary and of grammatical categories between Arabic and English.
54
(1) Fronting
Opposition to challenge Mubarak
Correspondents say Mr. Nour has little chance of success after decades of authoritarian
government and state influence in the media.
ْ‫ؿبئً االػالَ فب‬ٚ ٍٝ‫ٌخ ػ‬ٚ‫ّٕخ اٌض‬١ٌٙ ‫غ أٗ ٔظغا‬١‫ ِجبعن غ‬ٟ‫ع اثغػٍِٕفـ‬ٛٔ ْٛ‫ى‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ْ أٗ ِٓ اٌّز‬ٍٍٛ‫ي ِذ‬ٛ‫م‬٠ ٚ
.‫ػ‬ٛ‫ اٌف‬ٟ‫ فغصخ ف‬ٞ‫ؾ اِبِٗ ا‬١ٌ
ann yakun noor abraz munafesi Mubarak gheir anahu nadaran li heimanat al-dawla ala
wasael al-a‘lam, fa enna leisa amamahu aei fursa fi al-fawz
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text is consisted of the N in
correspondents, V in say and C in Ayman Nour, has applied to stand against President
Hosni Mubarak in elections due in September. This is unlike the Arabic version, where
the main syntactical changes have occurred. As a result, the V ‫ي‬ٛ‫م‬٠ „say‟ in the SL text
has been fronted at the beginning of the TL text. In addition to that fronting, the N
correspondents of the SL text has also fronted after the verb say in the Arabic version.
The phrase has little chance has been fronted at the end of the TL text. Thus, the lexical
word say, correspondents and has a little chance have been fronted into different
syntactic positions and according to the necessity of Arabic structure text. The
subordinate clause Mr. Nour has a little chance of success is fronted from its position as a
subordinate clause in the SL text due to cause sentence after decades of authoritarian
government and state influence in the media. It is noticed that the phrase has a little
chances of success is an effect, thus, the writer of the SL text is preceded it after the cause
phrase after decades of authoritarian government and state influence in the media. This
is unlike Arabic translation to the SL text, where the translator has fronted the cause
phrase َ‫ؿبئً االػال‬ٚ ٍٝ‫ٌخ ػ‬ٚ‫ّٕخ اٌض‬١ٌٙ ‫ أٗ ٔظغا‬nadaran‟due to‟ li heimanat‟controlling‟ al-
dawla‟the country‟ ala‟on‟ wasael‟means‟ al-a‟laam „the media‟, then the effect. This
relation is important and, therefore, the translator has been given special attention in
Arabic.
55
Opposition to challenge Mubarak
One of Egypt‘s leading opposition politicians, Ayman Nour, has applied to stand against
President Hosni Mubarak in elections due in September.
‫خ‬٠‫ أزشبثبد اٌغئبؿخ اٌّصغ‬ٟ‫زغكخ ظض ِجبعن ف‬٠ ‫ع‬ٛٔ

ٟٕ‫ؾ دـ‬١‫خ ظض اٌغئ‬٠‫ ارشبثبد اٌغئبؿخ اٌّصغ‬ٟ‫ذٗ ف‬١‫عاق رغك‬ٚ‫ اٌّؼبعض ا‬ٞ‫ُ دؼة اٌغض اٌّصغ‬١‫ع ػػ‬ٛٔ ّٓ٠‫لذَ ا‬
.‫ػ ثفزغح عئبؿخ سبِـخ‬ٛ‫ ٌٍف‬ٝ‫ـؼ‬٠ ٞ‫ِجبعن اٌظ‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text is a declarative sentence. It starts
with S in one of Egypt‟s leading opposition politician, Ayman Nour, V in has applied and
C to stand against President Hosni Mubarak in elections due in September. The
translator has fronted the SL text when translated ٞ‫ُ دؼة اٌغض اٌّصغ‬١‫ع ػػ‬ٛٔ ّٓ٠‫ لضَ ا‬qadam
Ayman Nour zaeem(leader) hizb (party) al-ghad(the tomorrow) al-masri (the Egyptian).
It is noticed that the translator has fonted or shifted the verb applied of the SL text from
its position after the pronoun Ayman Nour leading opposition politician , into the
beginning of the TL text, and as a main verb of the sentence in line with Ghazala (1995).
In addition, it is also noticed that the translator has shifted or fronted the SL the pronoun
Ayman Nour in the SL text from its position after multi nouns leading opposition
politicians into a main pronoun, after the verb َ‫ لض‬qadam ‗applied‘ in the TL text.
However, the fronting to the Ayman Nour and applied in the TL text are not made by
chance, but for good reasons. It is noticed that the fronted words have a more important
syntactical functions than the other parts of the sentence. This means that they play a vital
role in understand meaning. In line with Ghazala (1995), they must be taken into
consideration in Arabic text.
(3)
Riots after Sudan VP Garang dies
56
Large-scale riots have broken out in Sudan‘s capital Khartoum following the death of the
country‘s vice-president, former rebel leader John Garang.
‫ لغٔك‬,ٟٔ‫صا‬ٛ‫ؾ اٌـ‬١‫كغت ثؼض ِمزً ٔبئت اٌغئ‬

ُ١‫ اٌؼػ‬ٚ ‫ؾ اٌجالص‬١‫ اػمبة ِمزً ٔبئت عئ‬ٟ‫َ ف‬ٛ‫خ اٌشغغ‬١ٔ‫صا‬ٛ‫ اٌؼبصّخ اٌـ‬ٟ‫اؿؼخ إٌطبق ف‬ٚ ‫أضٌؼذ اػّبي كغت‬
.‫ْ لغٔك‬ٛ‫اٌّزّغص اٌـبثك ج‬
If we look at the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL consist of the multi nominal
compound large-scale riot and verb in broken out, and the complement in Sudan
Sudan‟s capital Khartoum following the death of the country‟s vice-president, former
rebel leader John Garang. During the process of translation, it is noticed that the
translator has translated the SL text into ‫اؿؼخ إٌطبق‬ٚ ‫‗ أضٌؼذ اػّبي كغت‬endala‘t (occurred)
a‘aml (works) shughub (riots) wase‘ah (large) al-nitaq (widely). The multi nominal
compound ‫اؿؼخ إٌطبق‬ٚ ‫ اػّبي كغت‬. Thus, both of large-scale riots and broken out are
fronting in the TL text. Both of the English phrase large-scale riots and broken out have
been fronted syntactically and according into the necessary of Arabic structure.
(2) Formal and Informal Style
(1)
Baghdad market blast kills scores

An explosion has ripped though a busy Baghdad market, killing at least 60 people,
officials say. Nearly 80 others were injured in the car bomb attack in Sadar City, a Shia
area frequently targeted by insurgents.
‫مزً اٌؼلغاد‬٠ ‫ق ثجغضاص‬ٛ‫ ؿ‬ٟ‫أفجبع ف‬

‫ت‬١‫ اص‬ٚ .‫خ ثغضاص‬١‫ق ِؼصدُ ثبٌؼبصّخ اٌؼغال‬ٛ‫لغ ثـ‬ٚ ‫ أفجبع‬ٟ‫ا ف‬ٍٛ‫ االلً لز‬ٍٝ‫ كشصب غ‬00 ْ‫ْ ا‬ٌٛٚٛ‫لبي اٌّـئ‬
ِٓ ‫ رؼغظذ‬ٟ‫ اٌز‬ٚ ‫خ‬١‫خ ثبٌؼبصّخ اٌؼغال‬١‫ؼ‬١‫خ اٌل‬١‫ٕخ اٌصضع طاد االغٍج‬٠‫ ِض‬ٟ‫لغ ف‬ٚ ٞ‫َ اٌظ‬ٛ‫ج‬ٌٙ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ كشصب ف‬00 ‫لغاثخ‬
.ٓ١‫ضاف اٌّـٍذ‬ٙ‫لجً الؿز‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text is used a formal and standard
language to report the news politically. It is also noticed that the main clause an explosion
has ripped though a busy Baghdad market has been translated formally into Arabic
standard language. The Arabic language is ‫ أفجبع‬ٟ‫ا ف‬ٍٛ‫ االلً لز‬ٍٝ‫ كشصب غ‬00 ْ‫ْ ا‬ٌٛٚٛ‫لبي اٌّـئ‬
57
‫خ ثغضاص‬١‫ق ِؼصدُ ثبٌؼبصّخ اٌؼغال‬ٛ‫لغ ثـ‬ٚ qaal (say) al-masalun (the officials) ann (that) 60
shakhasan (persons) a‘la (on) aqal (least) qutulu (killed) fi (in) enfijar (an explosion).
It is noticed that the Arabic version has been successful in style/ tone and offered the
meaning at the SL text positively making the translation formal and standard in line with
Ghazala (1995). Consequently, and in line with Ghazala (1995) is advised to translate the
SL text formally, if it is written formally to imply serious, conserving, and
internationality. Thus, from the above analysis, it is noticed that the Arabic version is
formal, without then are colloquial feature being used, so that it has reflected the same
function of the original.
Air strike on Palestinian PM‘s HQ

Israeli aircraft have launched an attack on Gaza City, hitting the office of the Palestinian
Prime Minister Ismail Haniya.
ٟٕ١‫ػعاء اٌفٍـط‬ٌٛ‫ؾ ا‬١‫ ِىزت عئ‬ٍٝ‫خ ػ‬١ٍ١‫غبعح اؿغائ‬

ٟ‫خ ف‬١ٕ٘ ً١‫ اؿّبئ‬ٟٕ١‫ػاعاء اٌفٍغط‬ٌٛ‫ؾ ا‬١‫ب ِىزت عئ‬ٙ‫ش‬٠‫ٌغ‬ٛ‫ ص‬ٜ‫ ادض‬ٟ‫ضفذ ف‬ٙ‫خ اؿز‬٠ٛ‫خ ج‬٠‫ً غبعح ػـىغ‬١‫كٕذ اؿغائ‬
.‫لطبع غؼح‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text is written in formal and standard
language, and without any colloquial lexical word. Thus, it has been also translated into
Arabic using a formal style. In line with Ghazala (1995) it is necessary to translate the
English formal feature into the same Arabic equivalent. Moreover, some of these feature
for example; ‗an‘ and ‗of‘ used elsewhere, for example; ‗an‘ in the SL text is referred, to
singularity, being one an attack only.
Consequently, the lexical word ‗an attack‘ is translated into equivalent singularity. The
Arabic version of an attack ‫ ;غبعح‬referring to one raid. In addition, the preposition ‗of‘ in
the SL text the office of the Palestinian is also not exist in the SL text. Thus, the
translator has been formally used the lexical singular word ٟٕ١١‫اٌفٍـط‬
al-filistini , which is equivalent in the SL text the office of the Palestinian.
58
(3)
US and Japan make troops cost deal

Japan and the United States have resolved a dispute over the cost of relocating 8,000 US
marines from Okinawa to the Pacific island of Guam. Tokyo had objected to US calls for
it to pay 75% of the estimated $10bn cost.
‫خ‬١‫ى‬٠‫اد االِغ‬ٛ‫ظغ اٌم‬ّٛ‫ي ر‬ٛ‫ د‬ٟٔ‫بثب‬٠– ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ارفبق اِغ‬

ِٓ ‫ص‬ٕٛ‫ظغ االف اٌج‬ّٛ‫خ رمبؿُ وٍفخ اػبصح ر‬١‫ف‬١‫ي و‬ٛ‫ دً ٌخالف د‬ٌٝ‫خ ا‬١‫ى‬٠‫بد اٌّزذضح االِغ‬٠‫ال‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٚ ْ‫بثب‬١ٌ‫صٍذ ا‬ٛ‫ر‬
‫خ‬١‫ى‬٠‫ ِطبٌت اِغ‬ٍٝ‫ لض اػزغظذ ػ‬ٛ١‫و‬ٛ‫ وبٔذ غ‬ٚ .‫ّب‬ٕٙ١‫ّب ث‬١‫ ف‬ٞ‫بص‬ٌٙ‫ػ ا‬١‫ اٌّذ‬ٟ‫اَ ف‬ٛ‫غح غ‬٠‫ جؼ‬ٌٝ‫خ ا‬١ٔ‫بثب‬١ٌ‫ا ا‬ٚ‫ٕب‬١‫و‬ٚ‫ا‬
.‫الع‬ٚ‫بعاد ص‬١ٍِ ‫غاد ػلغح‬٠‫ثبٌّبئخ ِٓ اٌىٍفخ اٌجبٌغخ دـت اٌزمض‬57 َ‫اْ رمض‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text is written formally and according to
the syntactical English structure. For example, the main subordinate clause is structured
as (N) Japan (Conj) and (A) the(N) United States(be) have(V) resolved (A) a (V)
dispute (P) over(A) the(V) cost (p) of (V) relocating (Q) 8,000 (N) US marines (P)
from (PN) Okinawa(P) to (A) the (N) Pacific island (P) of (PN) Guam. Consequently
and in line with Ghazala (1995), the translator has formally translated the above text into
ِٓ ‫ص‬ٕٛ‫ظغ االف اٌج‬ّٛ‫خ رمبؿُ وٍفخ اػبصح ر‬١‫ف‬١‫ي و‬ٛ‫ دً ٌشالف د‬ٌٝ‫خ ا‬١‫ى‬٠‫بد اٌّزذضح االِغ‬٠‫ال‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٚ ْ‫بثب‬١ٌ‫صٍذ ا‬ٛ‫ر‬
‫ّب‬ٕٙ١‫ّب ث‬١‫ ف‬ٞ‫بص‬ٌٙ‫ػ ا‬١‫ اٌّذ‬ٟ‫اَ ف‬ٛ‫غح غ‬٠‫ جؼ‬ٌٝ‫خ ا‬١ٔ‫بثب‬١ٌ‫ا ا‬ٚ‫ٕب‬١‫و‬ٚ‫ ا‬, where PN in tawasalat (reached), (PN)
in al-yaban (Japan), Conjunction in wa (and) PN in al-wilayat al mutahida al-
amreeykeyah (the United States American), P in ela (to), V in hal (resolve), N in li-khelaf
(dispute), P in hawl (about), Q in keifeyat (how to), N in kulfat (cost), V in ea‟dat
(repeat), N in tamaudea‘ (relocation), N in alaf (thousands), N in al junud (the soldiers),
P in min (from), PN in Okinawa (Okinawa), PN in al-yabaneeya (the Japan), P in elea
(to), N in jazeera (Island), PN in guam (Guam), P in fi (in), PN in al muheed al hindi
(The Pacific Island), P in fima beynahuma (among them).
As has been noticed that the two text written formally and according to the standard of
English and Arabic languages. In congruence with Ghazala (1995), it is necessary to
translate the English formal feature of the SL text into the same style of formality. The
above example has shown this style of translation. It noticed that thought Arabic
language does not have the identifier ‗a‘ in ‗a dispute‘, the translator has managed to
59
crate similar identifier, but it is a hidden article. If we look at the English single lexical
word ‗a dispute‘, it refers to a singular. Thus, the translator has given also a singular word
when he/she translated the lexical word ‗a dispute‘ into ‫ ٌشالف‬li-khelaf (dispute).
(3) Short Sentences
(1)
Gaza settlers face tough decision

Israeli settlers throughout the Gaza Strip are readying themselves for the start of the
official evacuation of the territory, which begins on Monday.
ٍٟ١‫ً االٔـذبة االٌـغائ‬١‫ غؼح لج‬ٟ‫ ف‬ِٟٕ‫رب٘ت ا‬

.ٓ١ٕ‫ب االث‬١ّ‫ رجضا عؿ‬ٟ‫خ اسالء اٌمطبع اٌز‬١ٍّ‫ غؼح ٌؼ‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٛ١ٍ١‫ْ االؿغائ‬ٕٛ‫غ‬ٛ‫ـزؼض اٌّـز‬٠
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the translation of the SL text is consisted of N
Israeli, N in settlers, Adv in throughout, P in the NP in Gaza Strip, be in are, V in
readying, Prn in themselves, P in for, D in the, V in start, P in of, D in the, N in official,
N in evacuation, P in of, D in the, N in territory, R in which, V in begins, P in on, and
N in Monday. The translator has translated the above English text into V in yasta‟ed (get
ready), N in al-mustautinun (the settlers), al-esraeliyoun (the Jewish), P in fi (in), N in
Ghaza (Gaza), N in li amalyat (operation), N in ikhla‟a (evacuation), N al-qata‟a (the
sector), R in alati (which), V in tabda‟a (start), Adj. in rasmeeyan (officially), N in al-
ethnaein (Monday).
Looking at the Arabic version, it is noticed that the version is translated without any extra
cohesive markers like ((then)‫ ف‬,ٚ (and) , ,‫ طاٌه‬ٌٝ‫( اظبفخ ا‬in addition), (in addition to that)
‫ طاٌه‬ٍٝ‫ح ػ‬ٚ‫ )ػال‬. In line with Ghazala (1995), this has reflected the follow up of events a
stage by stage. Consequently, it also noticed that it is not advisable to write the text in
one long sentence for it has a different function.
(2)
Zarqawi shows face in new video
Addressing US President George W Bush, he says: ―Why don‘t you tell people that your
soldiers are committing suicide, taking drugs and hallucination pills to help them sleep?‖
60
ٛ٠‫ض‬١‫ػ ف‬٠‫ كغ‬ٟ‫ىب ف‬٠‫ّخ اِغ‬٠‫ؼ‬ٙ‫ض ث‬ٙ‫زؼ‬٠ ٞٚ‫اٌؼعلب‬
ْٛ‫زؼبغ‬٠ ٚ , ْٚ‫ٕزذغ‬٠ ‫صن‬ٕٛ‫ي ٌلؼجه اْ ج‬ٛ‫ " ٌّبطا ال رم‬:‫ف‬ٛ‫عج ث‬ٛ‫ ج‬,ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ؾ االِغ‬١‫ب والِٗ ٌٍغئ‬ٙ‫ج‬ِٛ ‫ لبي‬ٚ
"‫َ؟‬ٌٕٛ‫ ا‬ٍٝ‫ؿخ ٌزـبػضُ٘ ػ‬ٌٍٛٙ‫ة ا‬ٛ‫ دج‬ٚ ‫اٌّشضعاد‬
.
(3)
Police hold four 21 July suspects

Roads were sealed off in west London as dozens of police, many armed and some in gas
mask, surrounded properties.
ْ‫ ثٍٕض‬5/21 ‫غاد‬١‫ُ ثزفج‬ٙ١‫غ اٌّلزجٗ ف‬١ّ‫اػزمبي ج‬

‫غ ِٓ عجبي اٌلغغخ‬١‫ّٕب دبصغ ػضص وج‬١‫خ ٌٕضْ ث‬١ٔ‫طب‬٠‫ غغة اٌؼبصّخ اٌجغ‬ٟ‫وبٔذ اٌلغغخ لض الٍمذ غغق ف‬ٚ
.‫خ ِٓ اٌغبػ‬١‫ال‬ٌٛ‫ُ االلٕؼخ ا‬ٙ‫ ثؼع‬ٜ‫اعرض‬ٚ ,‫ٓ ِٕبػي اٌلغغخ‬١‫اٌّـٍذ‬
(4) Long sentence
(1)
US warns Hamas over Israel blast
The Israeli army said the workshop was used by Palestinian militants to make rockets.
‫اكٕطٓ رذظع دّبؽ‬ٚٚ ,‫ت‬١‫غ رً اث‬١‫ رفج‬ٍٝ‫ً رغص ػ‬١‫اؿغائ‬

ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٛ١ٕ١‫ْ فٍـط‬ٛ‫ب ِـٍذ‬ِٙ‫ اؿزشض‬,ٍٟ١‫ق االؿغائ‬١‫ضفؼب اٌج‬ٙ‫ ؿجك اْ اؿز‬ٟ‫ اٌز‬,‫عكخ‬ٌٛ‫ اْ ا‬ٍٟ١‫ق االؿغائ‬١‫ لبي اٌج‬ٚ
.ً١‫ اؿغائ‬ٍٝ‫ب ػ‬ٙٔٛ‫طٍم‬٠ ‫ز‬٠‫اع‬ٛ‫صٕغ ص‬
From the above analysis, it well noticed that the SL text consist of D in the, N in Israeli,
N in army, V in said, D in the, N in workshop, be in was, V in used, P in by, N in
Palestinian, N in militants, P in to, V in make, and N in rockets. This is unlike the Arabic
version in terms of additional lexical words. It is noticed that the Arabic version consist
of Conj. In ٚ wa (and), V in ‫ لبي‬qala (say), N in ‫ق‬١‫اٌج‬al-jeish (the army), N inٍٟ١‫ االؿغائ‬al-
esraeli (the Jewish), Conj. In anna (that), N in ‫عكخ‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬al-warsha (the workshop), R in ٟ‫اٌز‬
alati (which), Conj. In ْ‫ ا‬anna (that), Adv. In ‫ ؿجك‬sabaqa (precede), Conj inْ‫ ا‬anna
(that), V in ‫ضفؼب‬ٙ‫اؿز‬estahdafaha (targeted), N ‫ق‬١‫اٌج‬al-jeish (the army), N ٍٟ١‫ االؿغائ‬al-
esraeli (the Jewish), V in ‫ب‬ِٙ‫اؿزشض‬estaghdamaha (used), N in ْٛ‫ ِـٍذ‬musalahun
(gunmen), Pro. ْٛ١ٕ١‫فٍـط‬Filistiniyoun (Palestinian), P in ٟ‫ف‬fi (in), V ‫ صٕغ‬suna‟ (make), N
in ‫ز‬٠‫اع‬ٛ‫ص‬sawarikh (rockets), V in ‫ب‬ٙٔٛ‫طٍم‬٠ yatlaqunaha (fired), P in ٍٝ‫ ػ‬a‟la (on), and
Pro. In ً١‫ اؿغائ‬esrael (Israeli).
61
From the above translation, it is noticed that Arabic contains many cohesive markers like‫ا‬
ٚ wa and ْ‫ ا‬anna . In addition, the Arabic version contains different extra lexical
phrases and words like ْ‫ ؿجك ا‬ٟ‫ اٌز‬, alati (which), Conj. In ْ‫ ا‬anna (that), Adv. In ‫ؿجك‬
sabaqa (precede), Conj inْ‫ ا‬anna (that). In addition to ٍٟ١‫ق االؿغائ‬١‫ضفؼب اٌج‬ٙ‫اؿز‬ ‫ضفؼب‬ٙ‫اؿز‬
estahdafaha (targeted), N ‫ق‬١‫اٌج‬al-jeish (the army), N ٍٟ١‫ االؿغائ‬al-esraeli (the Jewish).
Then, ً١‫ اؿغائ‬ٍٝ‫ب ػ‬ٙٔٛ‫طٍم‬٠ yatlaqunaha (fired), P in ٍٝ‫ ػ‬a‟la (on), and Pro. In ً١‫ اؿغائ‬esrael
(Israeli).In conclusion, the style of long sentence is a normal style that used in Arabic
language and seldom the translator imitate similar style in English.
(2)
Bolton appointed US envoy to UN
Confirmation hearings hit headlines during the spring but became mired in debate as the
Senate readied itself to consider the nomination of John Reborts to the US Supreme
Court.
‫ االُِ اٌّزذضح‬ٜ‫اكٕطٓ ٌض‬ٌٛ ‫ثب‬ٛ‫ٌزٓ ِجؼ‬ٛ‫ٓ ث‬١١‫رؼ‬

ِٓ ‫ ؿبدخ‬ٟ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ غبم ف‬ٚ ,‫غ‬١‫ٓ االسجبع سالي اٌغث‬٠ٚ‫خ لض رصضعد ػٕب‬١‫ض اٌزغك‬١‫ وبٔذ اٌجٍـبد اٌشبصخ ثزبو‬ٚ
.‫ب‬١ٍ‫خ اٌؼ‬١‫ى‬٠‫ثغرؾ ٌٍّذىّخ االِغ‬ٚ‫ْ ع‬ٛ‫خ ج‬١‫ رغك‬ٟ‫زب٘ت ٌٍٕظغ ف‬٠ ‫ر‬ٛ١‫ اسظ ِجبؽ اٌل‬ٞ‫لذ اٌظ‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫اٌجضي ف‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text consists of N in Confirmation, N in
hearings, V in hit, N in headlines, P in during, D in the, N in spring, Conj in but, V in
became, V in mired, P in in, V in debate, Conj in as, D in the,N in Senate, V in
readied, Pro. In itself, P in to, V in consider, D in the, N in nomination, P in of, S in
John Reborts, P in to, D in the, NP in US Supreme Court. This has been translated into
Arabic and a longer lexical words. Where ٚ wa (and), ‫ وبٔذ‬kanat (was), ‫ اٌجٍـبد‬al-jalsat
(the sessions), ‫ اٌشبصخ‬al khasa (the especial), ‫ض‬١‫ثزبو‬ bitakeed (by certain), ‫خ‬١‫ اٌزغك‬al
tarsheeh (the nomination), ‫ لض‬qaad (may), ‫ رصضعد‬tasadarat (headed), ٓ٠ٚ‫ ػٕب‬a‟naween
(headlines), ‫ االسجبع‬al-akhbar (the news), ‫ سالي‬khelal (through), ‫غ‬١‫ اٌغث‬al-rabea‟ (the
spring), ٚ wa (and), ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ‬laken al amr (but the matter), ‫ غبم‬ghaz (dive), ‫ ؿبدخ‬ٟ‫ ف‬fi
62
saha (in away), ِٓ min (from), ‫ اٌجضي‬al-jadal (the dispute), ‫لذ‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ ف‬fi al-waqt (in the time),
ٞ‫ اٌظ‬al-lathi (which), ‫ اسظ‬akhath (take), ‫ر‬ٛ١‫ ِجبؽ اٌل‬majles al shiyoukh (committee the
senate), ‫زب٘ت ٌٍٕظغ‬٠ yata‟hab lil nadir fi ( ready to look in), ‫خ‬١‫ رغك‬tarsheeh (nominate ), ْٛ‫ج‬
‫ثغرؾ‬ٚ‫ ع‬jun Roberts (John Reborts), ‫ ٌٍّذىّخ‬lil mahkama (to the court), ‫خ‬١‫ى‬٠‫ االِغ‬al amrikeya
(the American), and ‫ب‬١ٍ‫ اٌؼ‬al-a‟ulya (the highest).
It is noticed that the Arabic version has given extra lexical phrase and cohesive markers.
In terms of cohesive markers are ٚ wa (and), ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ‬laken al amr (but the matter), ‫لض‬
qaad (may). In terms of lexical phrases are ‫لذ‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ ف‬fi al-waqt (in the time), ٞ‫ اٌظ‬al-lathi
(which), ‫ اسظ‬akhath (take). In conclusion, the style of long sentence is a normal style that
used in Arabic language and seldom the translator imitate similar style in English.
(3)
Gaza settlers face tough decision
Israeli has set up checkpoints to prevent more sympathizers joining those among the
9,000 settlers who say they will defy attempts to evict them.
ٍٟ١‫ً االرـذبة االؿغائ‬١‫ غؼح لج‬ٟ‫ ف‬ِٟٕ‫رب٘ت ا‬

ُٙٔ‫ا ا‬ٌٛ‫ٓ لب‬٠‫غٓ اٌظ‬ٛ‫ ِـز‬0000‫ اي‬ٌٝ‫ٓ جضص ِٓ االٔعّبَ ا‬٠‫خ ٌّٕغ ِزظب٘غ‬١ِٕ‫اجؼ ا‬ٛ‫ً د‬١‫ظؼذ اؿغائ‬ٚ ‫ لض‬ٚ
.ُٙ‫ٌخ اسالئ‬ٚ‫ْ ِذب‬ٚ‫زذض‬١‫ؿ‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text is a complex compound sentence. It
is consists of the PN as in Israeli, V to be as in has, V as in set up, N as in checkpoints, P
as in to, V as in prevent, Adv as in more, N as in sympathizers, V as in joining, Pro. as in
those, P as in among, D as in the , ordinal N as in 9,000, N as in settlers , R as in who, V
as in say, Pro. as in they, model V as in will, V as in defy, N as in attempts, P as in to, V
as in evict and Pro. as in them. This is unlike Arabic where it consists of cohesive Conj. ٚ
Wa (and), cohesive model ‫ لض‬qaad (might), ‫ظؼذ‬ٚ wada‟at (put), PN as in ً١‫اؿغائ‬esraeel
(Israel), N a in ‫اجؼ‬ٛ‫د‬hawajiz (handicapped), N as in ‫خ‬١ِٕ‫ا‬amniyah (securities), V as in ‫ٌّٕغ‬
li-mana‟ (to stop), N as in ٓ٠‫ ِزظب٘غ‬mudahireen (demonstrators), Adj. as in ‫ جضص‬judud
(new), P as in ِٓmin, N as in (from),N as in َ‫االٔعّب‬al endimam (the joining), P as in ٌٝ‫ا‬
ela (to), cardinal N as in 9,000, N as in ٓ‫غ‬ٛ‫ ِـز‬mustautin (settler), R as in ٓ٠‫اٌظ‬alathina
63
(which), V as in ‫ا‬ٌٛ‫ لب‬qalu (say), PN as in a ُٙٔ‫ ا‬nahum (they), V as in ْٚ‫زذض‬١‫ ؿ‬sa yatahidun
(will unite), N as in‫ٌخ‬ٚ‫ ِذب‬muhalal (attempt), V as in ُٙ‫ اسالئ‬ikhla‟ahum (evacuate them).
In conclusion, the style of long sentence is a normal style that used in Arabic language
and seldom the translator imitate similar style in English.
(4)
US warns Hamas over Israel blast
The White House said it had noted reactions ― by several Palestinian terrorist groups,
including Hamas, that defend or even applaud the barbaric acts of terror committed in Tel
Aviv‖
‫اكٕطٓ رذظع دّبؽ‬ٚٚ ,‫ت‬١‫غ رً اث‬١‫ رفج‬ٍٝ‫ً رغص ػ‬١‫اؿغائ‬

‫ب‬ٙ١‫خ" ثّب ف‬١‫خ "االع٘بث‬١ٕ١‫ص فؼً ثؼط اٌفصبئً اٌفٍـط‬ٚ‫ " ٌمض الدظٕب عص‬:‫ي‬ٛ‫ اٌم‬ٌٝ‫ط ا‬١‫ إٌبغك ثبؿُ اٌجذ االث‬ٝ‫ ِع‬ٚ
‫ؾ‬١‫خ ِٓ جبٔت عئ‬١ٍّ‫خ ٌٍؼ‬٠‫ع‬ٛ‫ وّب الدظٕب االصأخ اٌف‬,‫ب‬ٌٙ ‫ ٍٍ٘ذ‬ٚ ً‫ ث‬,‫غح‬١‫ت االس‬١‫خ رً اث‬١ٍّ‫ صافؼذ ػٓ ػ‬ٟ‫دّبؽ اٌز‬
".‫ص ػجبؽ‬ّٛ‫اٌـٍطخ ِذ‬
Looking at the SL text, it is noticed that it is a compound sentence; it consists of the PN

as in the White house, V as in said, Pro. as in it, verb to be as in had, V as in noted, noun
as in reactions, P as in by, Adj as several, PN as in Palestinian, N as in terrorist, N as in
groups, V as in including, PN as in Hamas, R as in that, V as in defend, Conj. as or,
Adj.as in even, V as in applaud, D as in the, Adj as in barbaric, N as in acts, P as in of,
N as in terror, V as in committed, P as in in , and PN as in Tel Aviv. Consequently, it has
noted that the translator has almost followed the similar length when translated the SL
text into Arabic. The Arabic translation consists of the cohesive Conj. as in ٚ wa (and), V
as in ٝ‫ِع‬mada (go on), N as in ‫إٌبغك‬al-natiq (the spokesman), N as in ُ‫ثبؿ‬bi-ism (by
name), PN as in ‫ط‬١‫ اٌجذ االث‬al-beit al-abeid (the White House), P as in ٌٝ‫ ا‬ela (to), V as in
‫ي‬ٛ‫ اٌم‬al-qaul (the saying), ―Adv as in‫ ٌمض‬laqad (as), V as in ‫ الدظٕب‬lahadna (noted), N as in
‫ص‬ٚ‫ عص‬ridud (reactions), N as in ً‫فؼ‬fial (action), Adj. as in‫ ثؼط‬ba‘d (some), N as in ً‫اٌفصبئ‬
al-fasael (the groups), N as in ‫خ‬١ٕ١‫اٌفٍـط‬al-filistiniyah (the Palestinian), Adj. as in ‫خ‬١‫"االع٘بث‬
al-erhabeya (the terrorist), P as in ‫ثّب‬bima fiha (among them), PN as in ‫ دّبؽ‬hamas
(Hamas), R as in ٟ‫اٌز‬alati (which), V as in ‫صافؼذ‬dafa‘at (defended ), P ٓ‫ ػ‬a‘an (for), N as
in ‫خ‬١ٍّ‫ ػ‬a‘maleya (operation), PN as in ‫ت‬١‫رً اث‬tel abeb (Tel Aviv), Adv. As in ‫غح‬١‫االس‬
akheera (last), Adv as in ً‫ ث‬,bal (in addition), the cohesive Conj. as in ٚ wa (and), V as in
‫ ٍٍ٘ذ‬halalat (applauded), Pro. as in ‫ب‬ٌٙ laha (for it), Adv as in ‫وّب‬kama (as), V as in ‫الدظٕب‬
lahadna (noticed), N as in ‫االصأخ‬al-edana (condemnation), Adv as in ‫خ‬٠‫ع‬ٛ‫ اٌف‬al-fawreeya
64
(the quickly), N as in ‫خ‬١ٍّ‫ ٌٍؼ‬lil-amaleeya (to the operation), P as in ِٓ min (from), N as
in ‫جبٔت‬janeb (side), N as in ‫ؾ‬١‫عئ‬raees (president), N as in ‫ اٌـٍطخ‬al-sulta (the authority),
PN ‫ص ػجبؽ‬ّٛ‫ ِذ‬mahmood abas. (Mohmood Abas).‖
(5)
Iraq Shias state coalition terms
The Shia bloc which took the most votes in Iraq‘s election says it will form a coalition
with Sunni groups but only if they do more to combat the insurgency.
‫غب ٌالئزالف ِغ اٌـٕخ‬ٚ‫خ رعغ كغ‬١‫خ اٌؼغال‬١‫ؼ‬١‫ادؼاة اٌل‬

‫ض‬٠‫ اٌجض‬ٟ‫ اٌجغٌّبْ اٌؼغال‬ٟ‫ْ اوجغ رىزً ف‬ٛ‫زغاؿ‬٠ ٓ٠‫دض اٌظ‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫ اٌل‬ٟ‫ اػٍٓ ػػّبء االئزالف اٌؼغال‬,‫ ٘ظا االثٕبء‬ٟ‫ف‬
‫ص‬ٛٙ‫بَ ٘ظٖ االدؼاة ثجظي ج‬١‫ك طاٌه ل‬١‫ا ٌزذم‬ٛ‫ُ اكزغغ‬ٕٙ‫ ٌى‬,‫خ‬١ٕ‫ٗ االدؼاة اٌـ‬١‫ب رلبعن ف‬١ِٛ‫ْ ائزالفب دى‬ٍٛ‫لى‬١‫ُ ؿ‬ٙٔ‫ا‬
.ٓ١‫خ ِغ اٌّـٍذ‬ٙ‫اج‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫اوجغ ف‬
Looking at the SL text, it is noticed that it consists of D a in the, N as in Shia, N as in

bloc, R as in which, V as in took, D as in the, Adj as in most, N as in votes, P as in in, PN
as in Iraq, V as n says, Pro. as in it, M. as in will, V as in form, D as in a, N as in
coalition, P as in with, N as in Sunni, N as in group, Conj. as in but, Adv. as in only,
Conj. as in if, Pro. as in they, V as in do, Adj as in more, P as in to, V as in combat, D as
in the and N as in insurgency. Consequently , the Arabic version translated the above text
as Adv ‫ ٘ظا االثٕبء‬ٟ‫ ف‬fi hatha al-athn‟a (like this time), V as in ٍٓ‫ اػ‬a‟lana (advertise), N as
in‫ ػػّبء‬zua‟ma (leaders), N as in ‫ االئزالف‬al-etelaf (the coalition), N as in ٟ‫اٌؼغال‬al-eraqi
(the Iraqi), N as in the ٟ‫ؼ‬١‫ اٌل‬she‟ee( the Shia), N as in ‫دض‬ٌّٛ‫ا‬al-muwahad (the united), R
as in ٓ٠‫ اٌظ‬al-lathina (that), V as in ْٛ‫زغاؿ‬٠ yatar‟asuna (headed), Adj as in ‫اوجغ‬akbar
(most), N as in ً‫رىز‬takatul (body), P as in ٟ‫ف‬fi (in), N as in ْ‫اٌجغٌّب‬al-barlaman (the
Parliament), N as in ٟ‫اٌؼغال‬al-eraqi (the Iraqi), Adj as in al-jadeed (the new), Pro. as in
ُٙٔ‫ ا‬enahum (they), V as inٍْٛ‫لى‬١‫ ؿ‬sayushakiluna (will form), N as in ‫ائزالفب‬etilaan
(coalition), N as in ‫ب‬١ِٛ‫ دى‬hukumiyan (governmental), V as in ٗ١‫رلبعن ف‬tusharik fih
(participate in ) N as in al-ahzab (the parties), N as in al-suniyah (the Sunnis), Conj as in
ُٕٙ‫ ٌى‬lakinahum (but they), V as in ‫ا‬ٛ‫اكزغغ‬ishtaratu (conditioned they), V as in ‫ك‬١‫ٌزذم‬
litahqiq (to achieve) , R as in‫ طاٌه‬thalek (that), V as in َ‫ب‬١‫ ل‬qiyam (make), D as in ٖ‫٘ظ‬
hathih (this), N as in ‫االدؼاة‬al-ahzab (the parties), V as in ‫ ثجظي‬bibathal(do), V as in ‫ص‬ٛٙ‫ج‬
65
juhud (efforts), Adj as in ‫ اوجغ‬akbar (bigger), P as in ٟ‫ ف‬fi (fi), N as in ‫خ‬ٙ‫اج‬ٌّٛ‫ ا‬al-muajaha
(the confrontation), P as in ‫ ِغ‬ma‟ (with), N as in ٓ١‫ اٌّـٍذ‬musalaheen (insurgents).
Thus, and in line with Gjazala (1995), it is noticed that the translator should prefer similar
styleof length when translator the SL text into other languages such as Arabic.
(5) Active Sentence
(1)
Missile exports to Iran alarm US
―There are a lot of countries that allow the export of dual-use technologies, and the
position of the United States is that should be prohibited,‖
ْ‫غا‬٠‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫ب الٌغبء صفمخ ا‬١‫ؿ‬ٚ‫ا ع‬ٛ‫اكٕطٓ رضػ‬ٚ

‫ وّب‬,‫لف طاٌه‬ٚ ٓ١‫زؼ‬٠ ٗٔ‫ ا‬ٛ٘ ‫لفٕب‬ِٛ ٚ ,ْ‫غا‬٠‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫جخ االؿزشضاَ ا‬ٚ‫غ ِؼضاد ِؼص‬١‫ رـّخ ثج‬ٟ‫ي اٌز‬ٚ‫غ ِٓ اٌض‬١‫ٕ٘بن اٌىث‬
ْ‫غا‬٠‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫غ االؿٍذخ ا‬١‫ ػٓ ث‬ٍٝ‫ي اْ رزش‬ٚ‫ اٌض‬ٍٝ‫ٓ ػ‬١‫زؼ‬٠
(2)
Iraq leaders set for tough talks

The Shias are expected to form a government but must find coalition partners.
‫ اٌؼغاق‬ٟ‫خ ف‬١‫ِخ ائزالف‬ٛ‫ً دى‬١‫عاد ٌزلى‬ٚ‫ِلب‬

‫خ‬١‫ِخ ائزالف‬ٛ‫ؼخ االْ دى‬١‫لىً اٌل‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ز‬٠ ٚ
(3)
Bolton appointed US envoy to UN

US President George W Bush has formally appointed John Bolton as US ambassador to
the United Nations, without waiting for approval from the Senate

ْٚ‫ ص‬,‫ االُِ اٌّزذضح‬ٜ‫ ٌض‬ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ؾ االِغ‬١‫ ِٕصت اٌغئ‬ٟ‫ٌزٓ ف‬ٛ‫ْ ث‬ٛ‫ب ج‬١ّ‫ف عؿ‬ٛ‫ ث‬ٛ١ٍ‫عج صث‬ٛ‫ ج‬ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ؾ االِغ‬١‫ٓ اٌغئ‬١‫ػ‬
.ٓ١١‫ اٌزؼ‬ٍٝ‫ ػ‬ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ر االِغ‬ٛ١‫افمخ ِجٍؾ اٌل‬ِٛ ‫أزظبع‬
(6) Passive Sentence
(1)
US warns Russia over aid to Iran
Enriched uranium can be used as fuel in a nuclear activity, or, when highly refined , in a
nuclear weapon.
66
‫ب‬٠ٚٛٔ ْ‫غا‬٠‫لف ِـبػضح ا‬ٛ‫ ث‬ٛ‫ؿى‬ٌّٛ ‫خ‬١‫ى‬٠‫ِطبٌجخ اِغ‬
‫غ‬١‫ اْ وبْ ٘ظا االس‬ٚ ‫خ‬٠ٌٕٚٛ‫ صٕغ االؿٍذخ ا‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٚ‫ ا‬, ‫ض اٌطبلخ‬١ٌٛ‫ ِفبػالد ر‬ٟ‫َ اٌّشصت ف‬ٛ١ٔ‫عا‬ٛ١ٌ‫ـزشضَ ا‬٠ ْ‫ّىٓ ا‬٠ ٚ
.‫ت‬١‫خ ِٓ اٌزشص‬١ٌ‫ صعجخ ػب‬ٌٝ‫ذزبج ا‬٠
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text contains the passive form can be
used which is structured as model verb as in can, verb to be as in be, and verb as in used
Consequently, the Arabic version is translated as َ‫ـزشض‬٠ ْ‫ّىٓ ا‬٠ ٚ, where ٚ wa (and), ٓ‫ّى‬٠
youmkin (can), ْ‫ ا‬ann (that), َ‫ـزشض‬٠ youstakhdam (use). As a whole, cab be used is a V in
the SL text. Thus is unlike Arabic, where ٚ wa (and), ٓ‫ّى‬٠ youmkin (can), ْ‫ ا‬ann (that) is
S and َ‫ـزشض‬٠ youstakhdam (use) is V in the text. The style of passive is to concentrate on
the action and ignore the doer of the action. The translator has reflected similar function,
when concentrated only on the action of sentence during the translation.
Thus, The passive form of can be used is translated as a present simple along with a
cohesive marker ْ‫ ا‬anna (that). In line with Ghazala (1995), the passive of the above
translation is dominant and hence the stylistic effects are not the same as those of the
active. Reflecting similar passive form in the Arabic version can help the translator for
being sharp and critical in the translation.
(2)
US soldiers in Baghdad fighting
Taha al-Mutlaq, a businessman, was kidnapped several weeks ago, and found shot in the
head.
‫ ثغضاص‬ٚ ٞ‫ اٌغِبص‬ٟ‫ف ف‬١ٕ‫لزبي ػ‬

ٍٝ‫ جثزٗ ثؼض اغالق اٌغصبم ػ‬ٍٝ‫غ ثُ ػثغ ػ‬١‫ لض اسزطف لجً ػضح اؿبث‬-‫ عجً اػّبي‬ٛ٘ ٚ -‫ وبْ غٗ اٌّطٍك‬ٚ
.ٗ‫عئـ‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text contains the passive voice form was
kidnapped . It consists of verb to be was, and the main V kidnapped. It is noticed that the
agent is not known, since it might be not important to be declared. Similarly, it is noticed
that the Arabic version has reflected similar passive voice. The Arabic version contains
the cohesive marker in ‫ لض‬qaad (might) and V in ‫ اسزطف‬ekhtatafa (kidnapped). In line
with Ghazala (1995), the passive of the above translation is dominant and hence the
67
stylistic effects are not the same as those of the active. Reflecting similar passive form in
the Arabic version can help the translator for being sharp and critical in the translation.
(3)
Millennium bomber gets 22 years
Ressam was arrested as he crossed the US-Canadian border with explosives on the eve of
the new millennium.
‫ ػبِب‬22 ‫خ" ٌّضح‬١‫اٌذىُ ثـجٓ "ِفجغ االٌف‬

.‫ضح‬٠‫خ اٌجض‬١‫ٍخ االٌف‬١ٌ ٟ‫ػرٗ ِزفجغاد ف‬ٛ‫ د‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٚ ‫خ‬٠‫خ اٌىٕض‬١‫ى‬٠‫ص االِغ‬ٚ‫ع اٌذض‬ٛ‫ي ػج‬ٚ‫ذب‬٠ ْ‫ّٕب وب‬١‫ وبْ عاؿُ لض اػزمً ث‬ٚ
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text contains the passive voice form was
arrested , which consists of V to be as in was and the main V as in arrested. It is noticed
the agent is hidden in the above English text. Consequently, it is noticed the translator has
translated the passive form was arrested into ً‫ لض اػزم‬, where ‫ لض‬qaad (might) is a cohesive
marker and ً‫ اػزم‬ea‟taqal (arrested). Thus, ً‫ اػزم‬ea‟taqal (arrested) is V of the sentence.
In congruence with Ghazala (1995) the passive voice is frequently used in English when
the agent is not known. Similarly, Arabic may utilize the agentless passive voice in
comparable situation as noted in the above Arabic version.
(7) Repetition and Variation
(1)
Missile exports to Iran alarm US

―There are a lot of countries that allow the export of dual-use technologies, and the
position of the United States is that should be prohibited,‖
―All countries should refrain from military sales and arm sales‖.
ْ‫غا‬٠‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫ب الٌغبء صفمخ ا‬١‫ؿ‬ٚ‫ا ع‬ٛ‫اكٕطٓ رضػ‬ٚ

‫ وّب‬,‫لف طاٌه‬ٚ ٓ١‫زؼ‬٠ ٗٔ‫ ا‬ٛ٘ ‫لفٕب‬ِٛ ٚ ,ْ‫غا‬٠‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫جخ االؿزشضاَ ا‬ٚ‫غ ِؼضاد ِؼص‬١‫ رـّخ ثج‬ٟ‫ي اٌز‬ٚ‫غ ِٓ اٌض‬١‫ٕ٘بن اٌىث‬
.ْ‫غا‬٠‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫غ االؿٍذخ ا‬١‫ ػٓ ث‬ٍٝ‫ي اْ رزش‬ٚ‫ اٌض‬ٍٝ‫ٓ ػ‬١‫زؼ‬٠
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text contains the following syntactical
words: PN as in countries, N as in the export, NP as in that should be prohibited, V as in
68
sales. These lexical words have been repeated in the SL text. If we look at the phrase that
should be prohibited, we noticed that the variation on the export is the phrase that should
be prohibited. Looking at the Arabic text, which is our main concern in this analysis, it is
noticed also that the translation of the above underlined SL lexical words are the N as in
‫ي‬ٚ‫ اٌض‬al-diwal (the countries), the V as in ‫غ‬١‫ ثج‬beia‘ (sale), the Phrase ‫لف طاٌه‬ٚ ٓ١‫زؼ‬٠
yata‟ein (should) ‫لف‬ٚ waqif (stop) ‫ طاٌه‬thalik (that). Consequently, the Arabic version
has followed similar repetitions as in the SL lexical words when translated the SL text
into Arabic. The N ‫ي‬ٚ‫ اٌض‬al-diwal (the countries) in ‫ ٕ٘بن‬hunaka (there), ‫غ‬١‫ اٌىث‬al-katheer
(the much) ‫ي‬ٚ‫ ِٓ اٌض‬min al-diwal (from the countries) is repeated in ‫ي‬ٚ‫ اٌض‬ٍٝ‫ ػ‬a‟la al-
diwal (on the countries).
Other repetition is the lexical word ‫غ‬١‫ ثج‬beia‘ (sale) in the verbal phrase ‫ رـّخ‬tasmah
(allow) ‫غ‬١‫ ثج‬beia‘ (sale) is varied on the phrase yata‟ein (should) ‫لف‬ٚ waqif (stop) ‫طاٌه‬
thalik (that) referring to the V ‫غ‬١‫ ثج‬beia‟ (sale) in the Arabic version. In addition, the third
repetition for the V ‫غ‬١‫ ثج‬beia‟ (sale) is word ‫غ‬١‫ ثج‬beia‟ in ‫غ االؿٍذخ‬١‫ ث‬bei‟a al-asliha (sale the
weapons).In line with Ghazala (1995), some of these word sometimes are repeated
unnecessary in the TL text.
(2)
Iraq tribes ‗taking on al-Qaeda‘
A group of Sunni tribal chiefs in Iraq say they have caught more than 100 al-Qaeda
members in recent months. The tribal chiefs in the Iraqi province of Anbar joined forces
in September in an attempt to defeat al-Qaeda. They set the salvation Council for Anbar
and claim to have reduced the numbers of weapons and foreign fighters coming into the
area.
"‫ ٌٍمبػضح‬ٜ‫خ "رزصض‬١‫خ ػغال‬١ٕ‫ػلبئغ ؿ‬
ٟ‫ِٕبػعبء اٌمبػضح ف‬1000 ِٓ ‫ اوثغ‬ٍٝ‫ا اٌمجط ػ‬ٛ‫ُ اٌم‬ٙٔ‫ اٌؼغاق ا‬ٟ‫خ ف‬١ٕ‫ػخ ِٓ ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ اٌـ‬ّٛ‫لبٌذ ِج‬
‫ٌخ‬ٚ‫ ِذب‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٟ‫ي اٌّبظ‬ٍٛ٠‫ا‬/‫ ؿجزّجغ‬ٟ‫ُ ف‬ٙ‫ار‬ٛ‫ا ل‬ّٛ‫ ِذبفظخ االٔجبع لض ظ‬ٟ‫ وبْ ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ ف‬ٚ.‫غح‬١‫غ االس‬ٙ‫االك‬
ٚ ‫ سفط ػضص االؿٍذخ‬ٟ‫ب ؿبّ٘ذ ف‬ٙٔ‫ ػػّذ ا‬ٚ‫اؿـذ ٘ظٖ اٌؼلبئغ ِجٍؾ أمبط االٔجبع‬ٚ.‫ُ اٌمبػضح‬١‫ رٕظ‬ٍٝ‫ٌٍمعبء ػ‬
. ‫ ٘ظٖ إٌّطمخ‬ٟ‫ٓ االجبٔت ف‬١١ٍ‫اٌّمبر‬
69
(3)
Sharon arrives in Paris for talks

He is expected to discuss the forthcoming pullout from the Gaza Strip with President
Jacques Chirac. Mr. Chirac has described the withdrawal as courageous, and is expected
to urge more Israeli moves to keep momentum towards peace in the Middle East.
Mr.Sharon, for his part, is expected to use the visit to praise the French government for
its action against anti-Semitism in France.
‫غٌه‬١‫ؾ الجغاء ِذبصثبد ِغ ك‬٠‫ ثبع‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٚ‫كبع‬

ِٓ ٚ .‫ح كجبػخ‬ٛ‫غان االٔـذبة ثبٔٗ سط‬١‫صف ك‬ٚٚ .‫لغ اْ رزُ ِٕبللخ االٔـذبة اٌّغرمت ِٓ لطبع غؼح‬ٛ‫ِٓ اٌّز‬ٚ
‫ اٌلغق‬ٟ‫ اٌضفغ ثبرجبٖ اٌـالَ ف‬ٍٝ‫اد ٌٍّذبفظخ ػ‬ٛ‫ض ِٓ اٌشط‬٠‫بَ اٌّؼ‬١‫ اٌم‬ٍٝ‫ٓ ػ‬١١ٍ١‫غان الؿغائ‬١‫ذث ك‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫اٌّز‬
‫ب اِىبفذخ ِؼبصاح‬ٙ‫ ارشظر‬ٟ‫اد اٌز‬ٛ‫خ ٌٍشط‬١‫ِخ اٌفغٔـ‬ٛ‫بعح الِزضاح اٌذى‬٠‫ْ اٌؼ‬ٚ‫ـزشضَ كبع‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ز‬٠ ٚ .‫ؿػ‬ٚ‫اال‬
.‫خ‬١ِ‫اٌـب‬
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text contains the V to be as in is, the V
as in expected, the V pullout, The V as in withdrawal, and the V as in moves. If we look
at the SL text, it is noticed that these lexical words are repeated twice or thrice times in
the text. This kind of repetition is reflected in the Arabic text. If we look at the Arabic
text, it contains ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ِٓ اٌّز‬ٚ is consisted of the Cohesive ٚ wa (and), the P as in ِٓ min
(from) , the V as in ‫لغ‬ٛ‫ اٌّز‬al-mitawaq‘a (the expected) and the Re. ْ‫ ا‬ann (that). This has
been repeated two times, once in the ‫غان‬١‫ذث ك‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ اٌّز‬ٚ wa (and), the P as in ِٓ min
(from) , the V as in ‫لغ‬ٛ‫ اٌّز‬al-mitawaq‟a (the expected) and the Re. ْ‫ ا‬ann (that)yabhath
(search) and shirak (Chirac). The second repetition is occurred in ٚ wa (and). ‫لغ‬ٛ‫ز‬٠
yatawaqa‘‫( ح‬expect) ْ‫ ا‬ann (that) yastakhdim (use) sharoon (Sharon) al-ziyara (the visit).
Other word which is repeated is the N ‫ االٔـذبة‬al-ensihab (the withdrawal). It is

repeated once again in ٚ wa (and) ‫صف‬ٚ wasaf (described) shirak (Chirac) ‫ االٔـذبة‬al
ensihab (the withdrawal) . Lastly, the last repeated word is ‫ح‬ٛ‫ سط‬khetwa (step) is once in
the prepositional phrase ِٓ min (from) ‫اد‬ٛ‫ اٌشط‬al-khitiwat (the steps). The second
repetition is in the complement ‫اد‬ٛ‫ ٌٍشط‬lil-khuitwat (for steps), ٟ‫ اٌز‬allati (which) ..etc In
line with Ghazala (1995), some of these word sometimes are repeated unnecessary in
the TL text.
70
Conclusion
In the process of translation, there have been many stylistic changes. These changes are
within the realm of syntax (sentences, clauses and phrases) and changes that are within the
domain of morphology (tenses, verb morphology, modality and articles). Still other changes
are in the area of discourse strategies (direct/indirect speech, metaphors, connectives and
punctuation marks). Yet others are within the scope of lexical borrowing and claque. Then,
there are changes that come under transposition, modulation, adaptation, paraphrasing and
literal translation.
The syntactic comparison has shown a lot of shifts in style. In particular, these shifts have
been contributed mainly by the fact that English is a SVO language while Arabic is
basically a VSO language although there are also few Arabic sentences that are equational,
N-N, structure and SVO structure especially in stressed (emphatic subject) situations.
Consequently, in the process of translation many English SVO sentences are generally
changed into VSO sentences. In some restricted circumstances (where the subject N is
stressed), some SVO either remains as SVO or simply N-N structure. In complex
sentences, there are marked differences in style. Firstly, Arabic seems to favor commencing
the main clause with a VSO pattern that is preceded by a conjunction ٚ (wa) ‗and ‗ or ٓ‫ ٌى‬ٚ
(wa lakin) ‗and/but). The main sentence is usually followed by conjunction ٚ (wa), ٓ‫ ٌى‬ٚ
(walakin) in conjoined structures or by a complementizer ْ‫ا‬ (aan) ‗that‘ in the case of
complex structures with sentence subordination. Then, they may be followed by a string
of noun phrase, determiner phrases and adjuncts. In contrast, in the English ST, the main
clause is almost always of the SVO structure which is connected to subordinate relative
clauses and/complemntation. The subordinate clauses may be followed by adjunct phrases
such as the determiner phrase and the prepositional phrase. Compound sentences are
conjoined by the conjunction and/but. Secondly, in Arabic syntax a pronoun like ٛ٘ (huwa)
‗he‘ is often positioned after a subject N as in:
‫ سخً اػّا ي‬ٛ٘ ٚ -‫ واْ طٗ اٌّطٍك‬ٚ

[ wa [ [kana [ [taha al-mtlaq wa huwa rajul]]
‗and‘ ‗was‘ ‗Taha al-mutlaq - and he man…‘
71
In contrast, in the English ST, an N in subject position is never placed in apposition such as
(*Taha, he, is the man.).
In English compound sentences, although it is found that the translator has used different
styles in translating the conjunctions into Arabic, it would seem to have been acceptable if
the translator had translated the conjunction and literally into TT using similar connectives
like ُ‫( ث‬thumma) ‗then‘ instead of ٚ (wa) ‗and‘. This would not have affected the TT in
some cases , where the conjunction and in the first ST has been translated as ُ‫( ث‬thumma)
‗and‘ (then) in the TT. In other cases, the connective has been translated differently; that is
by changing the lexical word of the ST, where English but has been translated as wa ‗and‘
in ‫ٗ صِلك‬١‫ ِب رٕف‬ٛ٘ ٚ (wa huwa ma tunfeeh demeshq) ‗and that‟s what Damascus denies‟.
Here, structurally the TT text is similar to the structure of ST in that both are of the
structure [ IP-CONJ-IP].
English active sentences have been seen to have been transalted into Arabic by keeping the
active voice. However, ST passive sentences do not seem to always keep the passive
senses. Nonetheless, the fact that it is the action rather than the agent that is being focused,
Arabic sentences have been found to be able to retain the ST passive meanings but are
often expressed in TT in structures with sentence complements making them typically
Arabic; for example:
(a) „Enriched uranium can be used…‟  َ‫غرخذ‬٠ ْ‫ّىٓ ا‬٠ ٚ (Wa yumkin
ann yustaikhdam: ‗and can that used‘).= [Conj. V‘-Comp-]; section 4.8,example (59).
With respect to long sentences, it is found that the translator often keeps a similar length in
Arabic with stylistic changes via the introduction of extra phrases and clause connectives.
This has been seen in :
ST: Confirmation hearings hit headlines during the spring but became mired in
debate as the Senate readied itself to consider the nomination of John Reports
to the US Supreme Court.
72
TT: ‫ ٌىٓ االِش‬ٚ ,‫غ‬١‫ٓ االخثاس خالي اٌشت‬٠ٚ‫ر لذ ذصذسخ ػٕا‬١‫ذ اٌرشؽ‬١‫ وأد اٌدٍغاخ اٌخاصح تراو‬ٚ
ْٛ‫ر خ‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫را٘ة ٌٍٕظش ف‬٠ ‫ش‬ٛ١‫ اخز ِداط اٌؾ‬ٞ‫لد اٌز‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ عازح ِٓ اٌدذي ف‬ٟ‫غاؿ ف‬
.‫ا‬١ٍ‫ح اٌؼ‬١‫ى‬٠‫تشذظ ٌٍّسىّح االِش‬ٚ‫س‬
Trs:(Wa kanat al-jalasat al-khasa bi takeed al-tarshih qad tasadarat „anween
al-akhbar khilal al-rabee‟ , wa lakin al-amr ghasa fi saha min al-jadal fi al-
waqt alathi akhatha majlis al-shiyoukh yataahab lil nadir fi tarshih jun
Roberts lil mahkama al-„lya .)
[Conj‘- V‘- N‘-P‘ –N‘]-[Conj‘-N‘-N‘-P‘. N]‘- [IP‘-P‘]]]]]].
Various English sentence constituents of the ST such as the prepositional phrases, the
determiner phrases, the adverb phrases, the adjectival phrases and the verb phrases have
been seen to change their forms or have shifted their syntactic locations or have rephrased
them in various contexts in the TT. These changes are brought to bear in the TT so as to
make the style appropriate with the perception of the Arab speakers and be congruent
with the grammar of MSA.
References
CATFORD, J.C. (1965): A Linguistic Theory of Translation, London, Oxford University

Press.
LEFEVERE, André (1975): Translating Poetry, The Netherlands, Assen, Vancorcum.
NIDA, Eugene A. (1964): Towards a Science of Translating, Leiden, E.J. Brill.
NIDA, Eugene A. and Charles TABER (1982): The Theory and Practice of Translation,
Leiden, E.J. Brill.
STEINER, George (1975): After Babel: Aspects of Language and Translation, London,
Oxford University Press.
73
The Sociolinguistics and Cultural Considerations of English-Arabic Translation of
Political News.
Abstract
This paper examines the quality of the message in the Arabic translation of English
political news. Our data are 7 pairs of English political news ST and their corresponding
Arabic TT. It aims to find the answer to the research question in: What are the cultural
and sociolinguistics elements that control the English-Arabic political news translation?
Towards that end, a comparative methodology of the ST and TT will be adopted by
paying attention to examine the differences and similarities of the content of the message
in the ST and their corresponding message in the TT. In addition, Hatim (1997) and
Fishman (1972) ideas will be used.The findings have shown that cultural words do play
important roles in communication among nations and in the process of translation.
Hatim‘s ideas on artifacts, socio-facts and mantifacts have helped the analysis; that is,
creating a bettter understanding of the translating processes in the Arabic translation of
Engish news across different cultures and nations.
Key words: culture, sociolinguistics, translation, message, and political news
Introduction
Translation is considered a solid platform for communication between people of different

cultures. Gerding-Salas (2000: 1) has stated that ―the main aim for translation is to serve
as a cross-cultural bilingual communication vehicle among people‖. Thus any translator
plays an importance role as a bilingual or multi-lingual cross cultural transmitter of
different types of cultural aspect by translating the main concept and speech in a variety
of texts as accurate as possible, (Gerding-Salas (2000:2). Translators may use different
strategies and techniques to cope with cultural elements in translation, such as
transliterating and paraphrasing . The former relies on rendering the items in the source
text. The latter gives periphrastic explanation in a footnote, (Shunnaq 1998: 43) cited in
(Abdel Hafiz 2002).
74
Methodology
(Hatim 1997: xiii) notes that a careful consideration to a given text means ―…someone
for a partial view of what goes on inside that text.‖ Hence, he suggests that cultural
culture of Western and Islamic- Arab, and (b) the socio-linguistic element in situation
when they are in contact by using texts that people from different cultures can reach and
understand the culture of one another properly (Hatim,1997:157).
(Hatim‘s 1997:157) ideas are to view a text within and across a number of cultural

communication, what is at the root of the problem is invariably a set
of misconceptions held by one party about how the other rhetorically
objectives. Such notions would then be paraded as truisms about the
nature of the language of those on the other side, its textual norm
and its rhetorical tradition. (Hatim 1997:157).
With regards to English and Arabic texts, (Hatim 1997:173) identifies two kinds of
supportive audience. On the matter of the nature of the occurrence of audiences with
respect to text, (Hatim 1997:173) notes the following:
75
implicate text type, it does not necessarily make morality an exclusive
property of Arabic, English or any other language. Furthermore, some
languages would tend to display a particular preference for this or that
strategy, but this does not make tendency in question. These are merely
preferences, tendencies, trends. For example, Arabic prefers through-
argumentation whereas English orients its rhetorical strategy the other way,
towards counter-argumentation. (Hatim 1997: 173).
Fishman Sociolinguistic Concept on Language Reflections.
One of the major lines of social and behavioral science interest in language during the
past century (as in the case of linguistic relativity known as Whorfian Hypothesis, Whorf
(1940, 1941) as cited in (Fishman 1972:286) has been claimed that the radically differing
structures of the language of the world constrain the cognitive functioning of their
speakers in different ways, (Fishman 1972:286). Within the linguistic relativity view,
(Fishman 1972) notes the following claim:
….the background linguistic system (in other words, the grammar) of

each language is not merely a reproducing instrument for voicing ideas
but rather is itself the shaper of ideas, the program and guide for the
individual‘s mental activity, for his analysis of impressions, for his
synthesis of his mental stock in trade. Formulation of ideas is not an
independent process, strictly rational in the old sense, but it is part of a
particular grammar and differs, from slightly to greatly, between
grammars seem to be overstated and no one-to-one correspondence
between grammatical structure either cognitive or socio-cultural structure
measured independently of language has ever been obtained.
(Fishman 1972: 287).
To counter this view, (Fishman 1972) opines that it is less likely that the entire language
or entire societies are classified in such general way. Consequently, he offers an
alternative sociolinguistic explanation and stresses that (a) languages primarily reflect
rather than create socio-cultural regularities in values and orientations and (b) that
languages through out the world share a far larger number of structural universals than
has heretofore been recognized. He argues and supports his contention by noting that,
76
The very concept of linguistic repertoire, role repertoire, repertoire range
and repertoire compartmentalization argue against such neat classification
once functional realities are bought into consideration. Any reasonably
complex speech community contains various speech networks that vary in
respect to the nature and ranges of their speech repertoires. (Fishman 1972:
288 ).
Taken as a whole, Fishman‘s sociolinguistic views above holds that language is a

reflection of the socio-cultural and the values and orientations of its speakers rather than
it being regarded as a direct consequence or constraint of the cognition of its speakers.
On this point Fishman observes that there are ways in which lexicons and languages as a
whole are reflective of the speech communities that employ them and stresses further as
follows:
In a very real sense a language variety is an inventory of the concerns and

interests of those who employ it at any given time. If any portion of this
inventory reveals features not present in other portions this may be
indicative of particular stresses or influences in certain interaction
networks within the speech community as a whole or in certain role-
relationships within the community‘s total role-repertoire. (Fishman
1972: 296).
To support the above position, Fishman cites examples from Hebrew and Arabic terms
where they are retained not only for all traditional and sanctified objects but also with
certain Germanic elements in order to provide contrastive emphases; for example, bukh
‗book‘ versus. seyfer ‗religious book‘ , scholarly book‘; lerer ‗teacher‘ versus melamed
or rebi „teacher of religious subjects‘(Fishman 1972:297).
Relative to other theories on language such as generative grammar which is basically

cognitive and from the viewpoint of language behavior and social behavior, the language
reflection view of Fishman is related to language as parole (i.e., language as it is actually
used) as well as related to the cultural variation and social variation (Fishman 1972:299).
Hence, it is quite obvious that Fishman favours the idea that language is a reflection of
the social organization and he points out that lexicons in particular, and language as a
whole, are reflective of the speech communities that employs them. He, however,
acknowledges that there are areas in language where the linguistic relativity (i.e., the
77
Whorfian Hypothesis) view may be observed such as in the structuring of verbal
interaction and the structure of lexical components.
In summary, in weighing the sustenance or loss of the value of messages in the Arabic
translation of English news in later chapters as well as on style preferences, this study
will take cognizance of Fishman‘s sociolinguistic view and shall invoke it in the
appropriate places.
Data Analysis
Data 1
(1). (a). ST: „ Bin Laden call falls on deaf ears‟
BBC Monday , 24 April 2006

US intelligence believes the audio tape aired by an Arab TV channel is
genuine, making it the fugitive al –Qaeda leader‘s first message since
January.US opposition politicians said it only showed up the Bush
administration ‗s failure to capture Bin Laden.
(b). TT: " َ ‫ٗ ضذ ال عال‬١‫ٗ غشت‬١‫ث‬١ٍ‫تٓ ال دْ " زشب ص‬

‫ٗ اْ ذسشن اٌغشب ٌؼضي‬١ٌ‫ب ا‬ٛ‫ ِٕغ‬ٟ‫ذ‬ٛ‫ً ص‬١‫ ذغد‬ٟ‫ُ اٌما ػذج ف‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫لاي اعاِح تٓ الدْ صػ‬
"َ ‫ زشب ضذ ا ال عال‬ٟ‫ أٗ "ف‬ٟٕ‫ؼ‬٠ ‫اد دج زّاط‬١‫ح تم‬١ٕ١‫ِح اٌفٍغط‬ٛ‫اٌسى‬
( c ). Trs: (ben laden: hareb salebleebyah ded al eslam…)

(Qala osama ben laden z‟eem tandeem al qa‟eda fi tasjeel sawti mansub
eleih
ena taharuk alghrb l „zel al hukuma al filisteenyh biqeyadat hamas y‟ni
enahu fi harb ded al eslm. )
The underlined constituents of the ST in (1a), the fugitive al –Qaeda leader‟s, is given a
syntactic structure in (a‘), its corresponding Arabic translation, ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫(صػ‬z‟eem
tandeem al qa‟eeda), is given the structure in (b‘) below:
(a‘) …the fugitive al Qaedah leader… (b‘) ‫ُ اٌما ػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫صػ‬

(…z‟eem tandeem „al qa‟eda…)
In the above example, it is noticed that the Arabic term ‫( اٌما ػذج‬al-Qaeda) has been
borrowed in the English political news in (1a). The translator has used the same
determiner phrase in the TT in (1b) as evidenced from its transliteration in (1c).
Syntactically, it is also noticed that the same determiner phrase is sandwhiched between
two constituents, the fugitive and leader. As ‫( اٌما ػذج‬al-qa‟eda) is an Arabic determiner
phrase, the translator has retained it in the Arabic news as in (1b‘). As for the phrase al-
78
Qaeda leader‟s which has the structure [D‘-N‘] as in (a‘) above has changed to ُ١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫صػ‬
‫( اٌما ػذج‬z‟eem tandeem al-qa‟eda) which stylistically is [N-N-D‘] sequence as in (b‘)
above. The structural difference is that the political terms al-Qaeda‟ has been written
after two nouns, namely ُ١‫صػ‬ (z‟eem) ‗leader‘ and ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandem) ‗organizing‘. In
addition, it is noticed that the translator has used the definite article ‫( اي‬al) ‗the‘ to make
the noun definite in both the ST and the TT texts. In addition, it has been noticed that the
lexical adjective word ‗the fugitive‘ in the ST is changed into ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandem)
‗organizing‘. These changes in the description of Bin Laden‘s attributes are partly due to
the ideological perspectives the translator might have in his/her mind about Bin Laden.
Data 2
(2a‘) ‗Our goal is not defending the khartum government but to defend Islam its land
and its people‘,
(b) TT: " َ ‫ٗ ضذ ال عال‬١‫ٗ غشت‬١‫ث‬١ٍ‫تٓ ال دْ " زشب ص‬

" ٗ‫ ؽؼث‬ٚ ٗ‫ اسض‬ٚ َ‫ أّا اٌذفاع ػٓ ا ال عال‬ٚ َٛ‫ِح اٌخشط‬ٛ‫ظ اٌذفاع ػٓ زى‬١ٌ ‫ اضاف " اْ ٘ذفٕا‬ٚ
(c) Trs: (bin laden: hareb salebeebyah gharabiyah ded al e„slam)
(wa adafa ena hadafana leis al defa‟ „an hukumat al khartum wa enama al defa‟ „an al
eslam wa ardeh wa sh‟bih.)
It is noticed that the translator has respected most of the words when translating the ST into
Arabic text. It is noticed also that there is some structural stylistic correspondence between
the ST text and the TT text. That is, basically both are similar: one principal clause followed
by a series of conjoined clauses. Hence it is in keeping with a literal translation discussed
under this heading. The only difference is that the Arabic sentence is introduced by a
complementizer ْ‫( ا‬ena) ‗that‘. In addition, there is an obvious introduction of the definite
article ‫( اي‬al) ‗the‘ in some of the Arabic words such as َٛ‫( اٌخشط‬al-Khartum) ‗the Khartum‘,
‫( اٌذفاع‬al-defa‟) „the defence‘, َ‫( ا ال عال‬al eslam) ‗The Islam‘ when these definite articles do
not exist in the corresponding ST text. This is in keeping with Hatim‘s (1997) view that it is
culturally inherent in Arabic to begin a sentence with a clause introducer,‗a
79
complementizer‘, and to use a definite article when the content discoursally calls for the use
of the definite article such as in the case of َٛ‫( اٌخشط‬al Khartum) ‗The Khartum‘, ‫( اٌذفاع‬al
defa‟) ‗ the defence‘ to show the sharing of knowledge about entities. In adition, the
translator has translated the whole direct statement in the way it should be in Arabic text.
The full translation is to reflect Bin Laden‘s perspectives in terms of his ideological
thinking towards Islamic nations all over the world, and to make the international Islamic
communities support his ideological campaign against the West.
Data 3


A‟lana al raees al filistini mahmud abas enahu sayanqul maktabahu ela ghaza hata
entiha al ensehab al esraeeli min al qata‟.
Data 4
(4) ST (a): Iraq poised to choose new premier

A close ally of Mr. Jaafri, he recently headed a committee that purged
members of Saddam Hussein‘s Bath party from public life, raising fear his
nomination might be rejected by Sunni factions. However, Sunni
politicians indicated they would not oppose him.
(b) TT : ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬

‫ اػضاء زضب‬ٍٝ‫شج ٌدٕح زضشخ ػ‬١‫ٔح االخ‬ٚ‫ اال‬ٟ‫ لذ ذشاط ف‬ٚ ,ٞ‫شاعٗ اٌدؼفش‬٠ ٞ‫ج اٌز‬ٛ‫ زضب اٌذػ‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٞ‫اد‬١‫ ل‬ٟ‫زوش اْ اٌّاٌى‬٠
.‫ح‬١‫اع‬١‫اج اٌغ‬١‫ اٌس‬ٟ‫ اٌّؾاسوح ف‬ٟ‫اٌثؼث اٌؼشال‬
80
(c ) Trs: Yuthkar ana al maliki qeeyadi fi hezeb al da‟wa al lathi yrasah al j‟fari, wa
qad taras fi al aweena al akheera lejna hadarat „la a‟da hezb al b‟th al „raqi
al mushareeka fi al hayat al seyaseeyah
The second example is about an adverb that is proximated to a verb, [V adv [recently]
headed]. Here, the translator has translated the English adverb recently as Arabic ‫ٔح‬ٚ‫ اال‬ٟ‫ف‬
‫شج‬١‫( االخ‬fi al awena al akheera = fi ‗in‘, al awena ‗minute/period‘, al akheera ‗last‘).
The structures are noticeably different in that the [Subj-(ADV)-V-Object] word-order of
the ST has changed to [Conj-I-V-P-ADV] structure in Arabic. The N‘ subject has been
dropped and the sentence begins with a conjunction. It is a variation that the translator
has used in the process of translating the English adverb into Arabic in congruence with
Hatim‘s (1997) view of translating across different cultures.
Data 5
(5) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier.

The main Sunni coalition, the Iraqi Accord Front, has shown initial agreement
with Mr Maliki's nomination, a spokesman said.
(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬.

ٟ‫اص اٌّبٌى‬ٛ‫خ ج‬١‫ رغك‬ٍٝ‫خ ػ‬١‫ب اٌّجضئ‬ٙ‫افمز‬ِٛ ‫َ اٌجّؼخ‬ٛ٠ ‫خ لض ا ثضد‬١ٕ‫ اثغػ اٌجّبػبد اٌـ‬ٟ٘ ٚ ٟ‫افك اٌؼغال‬ٛ‫خ اٌز‬ٙ‫وبٔذ جج‬ٚ
.‫ػعاء‬ٌٛ‫ؾ ا‬١‫ٌّٕصت عئ‬
(c) Trs: Wa kanat jabhat al tawafeq al „raqeeyah wa heya abraz al jama‟at al suneeyah
fi al bilad qad abdat al youm al jum‟a muwafaqateha al mabdaeyah „la tarsheeh juad al
maleke lemansab reasat al wizara.
The noun phrase of the structure [D‘-N‘] in …the main Suni coalition…of the ST has
changed into a complex conjoined noun phrase [conj-N-A-D‘D‘] in the Arabic TT as in
‫خ‬١ٕ‫ اثغػ اٌجّبػبد اٌـ‬ٟ٘ ٚ (wa heya abraz al jama‟at al Suneeyah) ‗ and- she- main -the
group- the Sunnis‘. Here, the translator has translated the above noun English phrase into
Arabic with a different structural form as perceived by him and incongruence with his
perception of the Arabic language. In particular, he begins his phrase with a conjunction ٚ
(wa) ‗and‘ and added the necessary determiners ‫( اي‬al-) ‗the‘ for each of the nouns so that
81
it becomes grammatically acceptable and easily understood by an Arabic reader . In terms
of its content, the existence of the two Iraqi political parties, namely ‗Shia group‘ and
‗Sunni group‘ in the ST which have been translated or paraphrased into the TT, are
pointers to indicate that the Iraqi government has been politically and ideologically
divided into these parties.
Data 6
(6) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier‟

Members of Iraq's new parliament meet on Saturday to vote on a new
prime minister and other posts after months of wrangling over candidates.

(c ) Trs: T‟aqed al jam‟eyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeyah ( al barlaman) ejtema‟an al

youm al sabt lil musadaqa „ala adad min al manaseb al seyadiyah fi al dawlah bima
fiha akthar hatheh al manaseb ethara lil jadal wa huwa manseb raees al hukuma.
What used to be a verb phrase complement in the ST, ..on Saturday v[to vote on a new
Prime Minister ] has been translated into Arabic TT as a series of determiner phrases and
prepositional phrases. There is no verb. So, the structure is completely changed. The verb
to vote in the ST text has been translated into TT as a postposition determiner phrase
ٍٝ‫( ٌٍّصادلح ػ‬lil musadaqa „la) ‗the endorsement on‘ = [D-N-P]. Apparently, the
translator has translated it in accordance with his perception of the Arabic language and
hence making it appropriate to the Arabic readers which is congruent with Fishman‘s
(1972) ideas that language is a reflection of the socio-cultural and the values and
orientations of its speakers.
Data 7:
(8) (a) ST: US troops on Iraq abuse charges

BBC: Wednesday, 27 July
he said the abuses were allegedly carried out while the soldiers
were on operations in Baghdad.
(b) TT: ٓ١١‫ء ِؼاٍِح عدٕاء ػشال‬ٛ‫ٓ تغ‬١١‫ى‬٠‫د اِش‬ٕٛ‫اَ خ‬ٙ‫اذ‬
82
‫ؼ‬١‫ زغثّا لاي اٌد‬, ‫ تغذاد‬ٟ‫ح ف‬٠‫اخ اٌؼغىش‬١ٍّ‫ٓ خال ي اٌؼ‬٠‫ء ِؼاٍِح اٌّسردض‬ٛ‫ اٌؼشاق تغ‬ٟ‫ا ف‬١‫ى‬٠‫ا اِش‬٠‫خٕذ‬11 ُٙ‫اذ‬
.ٟ‫ى‬٠‫االِش‬
(c) Trs: Bi sua mua‟malat al muhtajazeen khelal al „maleyat al-

a‟skareeyah fi Baghdad…
Basically, the structures in both the ST and the TT are similar in that in both cases the
prepositions are retained within the general structure of [P-D‘]. There is a difference,
however, in the prepositions that are being used so as to suit the nature of the perception
of the Arabic speakers which is in congruence with Fishman‘s (1972) views that the
nature of language use especially in the repertoire range and network of interactions of
linguistic elements within a society is to a large extent the sociolinguistic reflections of its
speakers.
Conclusion
It has been found that translating from English news into Arabic has involved many
linguistic forms (words, phrases, clauses, sentences, metaphorical expressions) that have
cultural imports. As has been suggested by Hatim (1997), such cultural words do play
important roles in communication among nations and in the process of translation. Hatim‘s
ideas on artifacts, socio-facts and mantifacts have helped the analysis; that is, creating a
bettter understanding of the translating processes in the Arabic translation of English news
across different cultures and nations. In particular, we have been able to explain and to
attribute to cultural/ideological difference many translation phenomena and translation
problems that are related to metaphors and other culturally/ideologically loaded linguistic
forms.
The study also has noted that Fishman‘s (1972) sociolinguistic views and concepts have
been useful in our study. In particular, his views that language is a reflection of the socio-
cultural and the values and orientations of its speakers rather than it being regarded as a
direct consequence or constraint of the cognition of its speakers have helped us provide an
explanation for many translation phenomena that otherwise would have been difficult to
83
explain. In terms of Fishman‘s (1972) sociolinguistic view, the seemingly awkward Arabic
translation will become not awkward if the Arabic translation is seen from the socio-
cultural and ideological perspectives of the Arab speakers. That is, since it is a reflection of
the Arab society and its speakers, what seems awkward and incorrect (from the outside
world) has to be accepted as a correct translation in that language which is a reflection of
the speakers of that society.
References
Abdel-Hafiz, Ahmad- Sokarno. 2002. Pragmatic and Linguistic Problem in the

Translation of Naguib Mahfouz‟s The Thief and The Dogs: A Case Study. Uluum Al-
Lugha 17, pp. 3+28
Gerding-Salas, Constanza.2000. Teaching Translation: Problems and Solutions.

Translation Journal 4, No.3, Octobar 2000, pp.1+2.
Fishman, Joshua. (1972), Sociocultural Organization: Language Constraints and

Language Reflections, in Language in Sociocultural Change, Essays by Joshua A.
Fishman, pp: 269-286. California: Stanford University Press, U.S.A, pp.
287+288+296+297+299.
Hatim, Basil. (1997). Communication across Cultures: Translation Theory and

Contrastive Text Linguistics. Exeter: University of Exeter Press, U.K. pp.xiii+ 157 +173.
84
Differing Grammatical Elements as Agents of Change in
English-Arabic Translation of Political News.
Abstract
This paper focuses on the stylistic and grammatical changes that occur in English-Arabic
translation of political news. Hence, the researcher will show how the differences in the
grammars of the ST and TT contribute to the semantic changes. Thus, the main objective
of this paper is to answer the research paper as indicated here (a) what is/r the
grammatical change(s) that happen to the Arabic version? (b) How is/r the grammatical
change(s) effect the semantic of the Arabic version?. Towards that end, this paper will
deal with all the grammatical and semantically changes which might occur to the Arabic
version. The paper would make use of the stylistic analysis in English-Arabic translation
by Ghazala (1995) and Hatim‘s theory (1997) to observe how the translational process
changes the semantics meaning to the Arabic version. The data have shown that most of
the grammatical and stylistic changes are due to cultural and sociolinguistic background.
And other changes are due to translator‘s ignorance of the English-Arabic grammar,
since his/her main target is to translate the message of the English text to his/her readers.
Key words: grammar, semantics, changes, style and translation
Introduction
Methodology
(Hatim 1997: xiii) notes that a careful consideration to a given text means ―…someone
85
for a partial view of what goes on inside that text.‖ Hence, he suggests that cultural
culture of Western and Islamic- Arab and the second, and (b) the socio-linguistic element
in situation when they are in contact by using texts that people from different cultures can
reach and understand the culture of one another properly (Hatim 1997:157).
(Hatim1997:157) ideas are to view a text within and across a number of cultural

communication, what is at the root of the problem is invariably a set
of misconceptions held by one party about how the other rhetorically
objectives. Such notions would then be paraded as truisms about the
nature of the language of those on the other side, its textual norm
and its rhetorical tradition. (Hatim 1997:157).
With regards to English and Arabic texts, (Hatim 1997:173) identifies two kinds of
supportive audience.
On the matter of the nature of the occurrence of audiences with respect to text, Hatim
(1997:173) notes the following:
implicate text type, it does not necessarily make orality an exclusive property
of Arabic, English or any other language. Furthermore, some languages
would tend to display a particular preference for this or that strategy, but this
does not make tendency in question. These are merely preferences,
tendencies, trends. For example, Arabic prefers through-argumentation
86
whereas English orients its rhetorical strategy the other way, towards counter-
argumentation. (Hatim 1997: 173).
To summarize, this study will take cognizance of Hatim‘s views on communication

across different nations/cultures for the very data to be dealt with later in Chapters 4
through 7 are expressions and exponents of two cultures: that of English speakers and
that of Arabic speakers.
Ghazala (1995).
(Ghazala, 1995:246).

87
Data Analysis
not specialized group of people; instead they are laymen. These newspaper articles are
not of general nature; instead they are news on political events and happenings. All these
articles have been taken from the Internet, since parallel versions in Arabic can be
accessed easily.
Stylistic Change to Past Continuous.
Consider the following data in (1a) and its Arabic translation in (1b):
(1) (a) ST: ‗Maliki endorsed as new PM‘
Iraq's President Jalal Talabani has asked Shia politician Jawad al-Maliki to
form the country's next government.
BBC Saturday, 22 April 2006.
‫ دِح‬ٕٞٛ٠ ٗٔ‫ِح اٌّمثٍح ا‬ٛ‫ً اٌسى‬١‫ ترؾى‬ٟٔ ‫ظ خال ي اٌطٍثا‬١‫فٗ ِٓ طشف اٌشئ‬١ٍ‫ا تؼذ ذى‬ٙ‫ٍم‬٠ ‫ي وٍّح‬ٚ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٟ‫ لاي اٌّاٌى‬ٚ
.‫ح‬١‫ضغ زذ ال ػّاي اٌؼٕف اٌطائف‬ٌٛ ٝ‫ أٗ ِغؼ‬ٍٝ‫ّا فغش ػ‬١‫ ف‬ٟ‫ؼ اٌؼشال‬١‫ اٌد‬ٟ‫ؾاخ اٌّغٍسح ف‬١ٍ١ٌّ‫ا‬
( c) Trs: (al maleki : ureed tashkeel hukuma tumathel atyaf al mujtam‟ al „raqi)
( wa qala al maliki fi awal kalimah yalqaha b‟da takleefih min taraf al raees jalal
al talabani bitashkil al hukuma al muqbila enahu yanwi damj al milishat al musalaha fi al jeish
al „raqi, fimah fasarah „la enahu mas‟a liwad‟ had li a‟mal al „unf al taefeyah.)
With respect to the data in (1a) above, we are concerned with the clause Iraq‟s President
Jalal Talabani has asked. Its linear structure is as in (a‘) below and the structure of its
corresponding Arabic translation in a phrase marker is in (b‘):
88
(a‘) ST: Iraq‘s President Jalal Talabani has asked…
[ [ Iraq‘s President] [ [ Jalal Talabani] ] [ has asked]…]
IP N‘ IP V‘
(b‘) TT: […[takleefih min taraf al raees jalal al talabani. …]
It is noticed that the translator has made stylistic changes that lead to optional transposition.
From the above data, it is noticed that the English phrase has asked in the ST is a present
perfect, and to translate this into Arabic, the translator must used a past simple. This is because
Arabic has no corresponding tense for the English present perfect. It is noticed, however, that the
translator has used the past continuous tense translating has asked into ٗ‫ف‬١ٍ‫( ذى‬takleefahu) (orally
takleefih) ‗was asking‘. If the translator had translated has asked into the past simple, the
stylistic structure would have been acceptable. The translator has, however, made an optional
stylistic change by using the past continuous tense in the TT text.
The verb phrase has asked consists of the verb has and the main verb asked in a past form. On
the other hand, the same structure in the TT consists of two lexical words which are the main
verb ‫ف‬١ٍ‫( ذى‬takleef) „asked‘ and the pronoun ٖ‫( ا‬ahu) ‗him‘ (colloquially as –ih) that refers to the
PM, al-Maliki.Looking at both (a‘) and (b‘) above in a broader syntactic term, the English ST is
of the structure [ N‘-Subordinate sentence—Predicate…] where the sentence begins with a
genetive noun phrase, the corresponding Arabic translation has a structure [V‘-P‘-D‘-[
Subordinate sentence]] where the sentence begins with a verb. This is a case of movements
which he terms as ‗fronting‘, making the sentence a formal style.
We will now consider another case of stylistic change due to a change of tense in (2a) through
(2c ) below:
BBC: Tuesday, 26 July 2006
only a year ago, Mr. Chirac was making it plain that Mr. Sharon was not
welcome in Paris….
( b) ‫شان‬١‫ظ ال خشاء ِسادثاخ ِغ ؽ‬٠‫ تاس‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٚ‫ؽاس‬
‫د‬ٛٙ١ٌ‫ راٌه تؼذ اْ دػا ا‬ٚ ‫ظ‬٠‫ تاس‬ٟ‫ش ِشزة تٗ ف‬١‫ْ غ‬ٚ‫ذ تاْ ؽاس‬ٛ‫ض‬ٛ‫ ت‬ٟ‫ز‬ٛ٠ ‫شان‬١‫ واْ ذصشف ؽ‬,‫ازذ فمظ‬ٚ َ‫لثً ػا‬
. ‫ فشٔغا‬ٟ‫ح ف‬١ِ‫ اٌؼذاء ٌٍغا‬ٟ‫ً تغثة ِا اػرثشٖ ذصاػذا ف‬١‫ اعشائ‬ٌٝ‫دشج ا‬ٌٙ‫ ا‬ٌٝ‫ٓ ا‬١١‫اٌفشٔغ‬
( c ) ( …qabla ‟am wahed faqat, kana tasaruf sheerak youhi bi widuh ….
89
The following linear structures in (a‘) and (b‘) below show the syntactic difference
(a‘) ST: Mr. Chirac was making it plain…
[ [ Mr. Chirac [ was [making [ it ] [ plain ….]]]]

IP Spec I‘ V‘ N‘ A‘
(b‘) ‫ذ‬ٛ‫ض‬ٛ‫ ت‬ٟ‫ز‬ٛ٠ ‫شان‬١‫واْ ذصشف ؽ‬

kana tasaruf sheerak youhi bi udeuh ….
[ …[kana [ tasaruf [ Shirac ] [ youhee [ bwiduh.... ]]]]]]
IP I‘ V‘ N‘ V‘ A
‗was behaving inspiring plain…
If we look at the ST text above, it has a [Spec-V-obj./N‘] word-order and its tense is in
the past continuous, was making. It has been translated into a [V‘-S-V‘-A] word-order
and is preceded by a past tense marker ْ‫( وا‬kana) ‘past‘ in Arabic. Not only has there
been a structural change in constituent sequence, but the tense has been maintained in the
past continuous tense in the TT as both the Arabic verbs ‫( ذصشف‬tasaruf) ‗behaving‘ and
ٟ‫ز‬ٛ٠ (youhee) ‗inspiring‘ are in the continuous forms.
Stylistic Changes to the Past Simple Tense.
We will now consider the English data in (3a) and its Arabic translation in (3b) below:
(3 ) (a) ST: „US warns Russia over aid to Iran‟

BBC Wednesday, 19 April 2006
US officials believe it has helped bolster Iranian nuclear know-how.
‫ا‬ٙ‫ض لذسذ‬٠‫ ذؼض‬ٟ‫شج ف‬١‫شاْ عاػذخ االخ‬٠‫ا ال‬١‫ع‬ٚ‫ا س‬ِٙ‫ ذمذ‬ٟ‫ح اٌر‬١ٕ‫ْ اْ اٌخثشاخ اٌف‬ٛ١١‫ى‬٠‫ْ االِش‬ٌٛٚ‫ؼرمذ اٌّغؤ‬٠ٚ
.‫ح‬٠ٌٕٚٛ‫ا‬
(c) Trs wa ya‟ataqed al-masulun al-amrikiyoun ana al-khibrat al-faniyah alati tuqadimaha
rusyia lie ran sa‟dat al-akhira fi ta‟ziz qudrataha al-nuwawiya
The following linear structure in labeled bracketing in (a‘) and (b‘) show a syntactic
difference between the ST and the TT:
90
(a‘) ST:…. it has helped bolster Iranian nuclear know-how.
[… [ it ] [has [helped [ bolster [Iranian nuclear know-how]]]

IP Spec I‘ V‘ V‘
(b‘) TT: ٗ‫ض لذسذ‬٠‫ ذؼض‬ٟ‫شج ف‬١‫شاْ عاػذخ االخ‬٠‫ا ال‬١‫ع‬ٚ‫ا س‬ِٙ‫ ذمذ‬ٟ‫ح اٌر‬١ٕ‫ْ اْ اٌخثشاخ اٌف‬ٛ١١‫ى‬٠‫ْ االِش‬ٌٛٚ‫ؼرمذ اٌّغؤ‬٠ٚ
‫ا‬ .‫ح‬٠ٌٕٚٛ‫ا‬
sa‟dat al-akhira fi t‟aziz
[…..[ s‘adat [al-akhira [fi t‘‘aziz…]]]].
IP V Adv P
From the above examples, it is noticed that the present perfect tense has helped in the ST has
been translated into the past simple tense in the TT. The translator does not retain the original
tense as there is no similar tense in Arabic; instead, he has to resort changing it to the past tense.
It is an obligatory change when translating a present perfect tense like has helped.
We will move on to consider the English data in (4a), its corresponding Arabic translation in (4b)
and its transliteration in (4c) below:
(4) (a) ST: US troops on Iraq abuse charges
BBC: Wednesday, 27 July 2006
The military said the charges related to reports that the soldiers had assaulted a
suspected insurgent.
(b) TT: ٓ١١‫ء ِؼاٍِح عدٕاء ػشال‬ٛ‫ٓ تغ‬١١‫ى‬٠‫د اِش‬ٕٛ‫اَ خ‬ٙ‫اذ‬

ٌٝ‫ض اٌّؾرثٗ تٗ ا‬٠‫ا عالزا خاصا ٌرؼش‬ِٛ‫د اعرخذ‬ٕٛ‫ح ٔمٍد ِضاػُ تاْ اٌد‬١‫ى‬٠‫ّض اال ِش‬٠‫ظ ذا‬١ٍ‫ط اذد‬ٌٛ ‫فح‬١‫ش اْ صس‬١‫غ‬
.‫ح‬١‫شتائ‬ٙ‫صذِاخ و‬
(c) Trs: (itaham jinud amrikiyeen bi-sua mu‟amalat sujanaa „raqiyeen)

(Gheira ana sahifat lus anjilis timez al-amrikeeya naqalat maza‟am biana al-junud istakhdamu
silahan khasan lita‟rid al-mushtabah bihi ela sadamat kahrabaeya).
The following phrase markers in (a‘) and (b‘) below show a syntactic difference between
the structure of ST and the TT:
(a‘) the soldiers had assaulted a suspected insurgent.
If we look at the second BBC example, it is noticed that the expression had assaulted has been
translated into the past simple tense (‫ا‬ِٛ‫ ( ) اعرخذ‬istakhdamu) ‗assaulted‘ in the TT text.
91
Structurally two lexical words in had assaulted has been changed to a single simple past tense
in Arabic, (‫ا‬ِٛ‫‗ )اعرخذ‬used‘.
Stylistic Changes to Future Simple Tense.
We will now move on to consider an English data containing a continuous tense in (5a), its
corresponding Arabic translation in (5b) and the Arabic transliteration in (5c):


A‟lana al raees al filistini mahmud abas enahu sayanqul maktabahu ela
ghaza hata entiha al ensehab al esraeeli min al qata‟.
The following linear structures in (a‘) and ((b‘) in leballed bracketing show a difference
between them:


tense of the ST to a future simple tense ‫( ط‬sa) „will‘ and ً‫ٕم‬٠ (yantaqel) ‗move‘. Besides,
92
Consider next the following data in (6a), the Arabic translation in (6b) and its
transliteration in (6c) below:
(6) (a) ST : Abbas moves to Gaza for pull out

He said he would be co-coordinating the Palestinian side of the withdrawal, and
mediating between different factions.
(b) TT:ٍٟ١‫ غؼح ٌّزبثؼخ االٔـذبة االؿغائ‬ٌٝ‫ٕمً ِمغٖ ا‬٠ ‫ػجبؽ‬

‫ٓ اٌفصائً اٌّخرٍفح‬١‫عظ ت‬ٛ‫ر‬٠ ٚ ٟٕ١‫لف اٌدأة اٌفٍغط‬ِٛ ‫ٕغك‬١‫ اضاف أٗ ع‬ٚ
(c) Trs: ‗bas yanqul maqarahu ela ghaza li mutaba‟t al ensehab al esraeli
Wa adafa enahu sayunaseq mauqef al janeeb al feelistini athna al ensehab,
wa yatawasat bena al fasael al mukhtalefa.
The following linear structures in labelled bracketing in (a‘) and (b‘) below show a
difference in tense between the ST and the TT:
(a) ST: … he would be co-coordinating the Palestinian side…

[…[he] [ would be [co-ordinating [ the Plestenian side]]…]
IP Spec I‘ (+past,+future) V‘ N‘
(b) TT: ٟٕ١‫لف اٌدأة اٌفٍغط‬ِٛ ‫ٕغك‬١‫أٗ ع‬

… enahu sayunaseq mauqef al janeeb al feelistini…
[…[enahu] [ sa [ yunaseq [al jeneeb] [al felistini]…]]]

IP Spec I (+future) V‘ D‘ D‘
‗he coordinate the side the Palestinan‘
In (a‘-b‘) above, the future in the past in would be co-ordinating of the ST text has been
translated into a present future tense in Arabic, namely: ‫لف‬ِٛ ‫ٕغك‬١‫( ع‬sa yunasequ) ‗will
co-ordinate‘. In so far as the sequence of the constituents is concerned, they keep almost
a similar structure.
We move on to consider a case where the future tense of the ST is sustained in the TT
text as in (7a-c) below:
93
(7) (a) ST: Boltton appointed US envoy to UN
BBC: Monday, 1 August 2006
At times a stern of the UN, he will serve there until 2007…
(b) TT: ‫ اال ُِ اٌّرسذج‬ٜ‫اؽٕطٓ ٌذ‬ٌٛ ‫ثا‬ٛ‫ٌرٓ ِثؼ‬ٛ‫ٓ ت‬١١‫ذؼ‬

ْٛٔ‫ وا‬/ ‫ش‬٠‫ٕا‬٠ ٝ‫ح زر‬١ٌٚ‫ إٌّضّح اٌذ‬ٟ‫ ِّثال تال دٖ ف‬, ‫خٗ أرماداخ الرػح ٌالُِ اٌّرسذج‬ٚٚ ‫ عثك‬ٞ‫ اٌز‬, ٓ‫ٌر‬ٛ‫ؼًّ ت‬٠ ‫ف‬ٛ‫ ع‬ٚ
2005 ٟٔ‫اٌثا‬
(c) Trs wa saufa ya‟mal bultn…………
The following linear structures in label bracketings in (a‘-b‘) below show the syntactic difference
(a‘) ST: He will serve there until 2007.

[ [ he ] [ will [ serve there until 2007]]]
IP Spec I‘ (+future) V‘
(b‘) TT: ٓ‫ٌر‬ٛ‫ؼًّ ت‬٠ ‫ف‬ٛ‫ ع‬ٚ

(wa saufa ya‟mal bultn…)
[ [ … ] [ sauf [ ya‟mal bultn …..]]
IP Spec I‘ (+future) V‘
‗will he- working‘
With respect to tense, the TT has maintained the future tense of the ST. In term of the
structure however, there is a difference in that the TT text has no overt subject noun
phrase as its (third person-male-singular) subject has been recorded in the verb
morphology by the prefix ٞ (ya-) in ًّ‫ؼ‬٠ (ya‟mal) ‗working‘.
Conclusion
From the English-Arabic analysis, it has been found that the translator does not seem to pay
much concern about the grammatical tenses of the ST messages when translating English
ST into Arabic. Instead, due to an absense of similar tenses in Arabic to match the tenses of
the ST especially the perfect (past/presnt) tense, the translator‗s main concern seems to be
to transfer the general content or to convey only the gist of the ST message to the Arabic
reading public taking cognizance more of their cultural, sociolinguistic and social
backgrounds. This is so because it has been noted that the changes of this nature mostly
pertains to changes in the translation of functional words like the adverbs and in the
94
translation of the tenses such as perfect tense (past and present). That is perfect tenses 
past simple tense and English future tense  Arabic present continuous tense
References
Hatim, B. (2000). English-Arabic/ Arabic-English Translation: A Practical Guide.

London: Al Saqi Publication.
Ghazala, H. (1995). Translation as Problems and Solutions: A Coursebook for University Students and
Trainee Translators. Beirut: Dar wa Maktabat Al-Hilal. Lebanon
95
Teaching English words formation in academic writing: Analysis
and Remedy
ABSTRACT
This paper is both a linguistic study and a search for learning using word formation, such
as English compound. Compound constructions are very common in everyday speech and
all types of written texts. They have been selected for study because ELL (English
language Learners) often ignores them from their academic writing. The reasons for
conducting such research are also linguistic and pedagogic in nature. ELL might find it
difficult to cope with the complex constructions which might absent in their languages.
Key words: compounds, strategies, problems, ELT and semantics
INTRODUCTION
Different approaches to English Language Teaching have dealt with word formation in
different ways. Not so long when Michael West‘s books were in vogue, there was a great
deal of emphasis on the teaching of word formation, based on the well- known word-
frequency counts. Those words formation which were found to be most frequently used
in written texts.
In the 1950s, and as sort of attention to the teaching of formal grammar and the emphasis
on vocabulary, the audio-lingual approach went to the other extreme, focusing on the
structures of language which had to be taught in a practical manner, and considerably de-
emphasizing the role of word formation Kharma & Hajjaj (1989:36).
Though the ELT scene is radically changing nowadays, no serious attention is being paid
to word formation as such. It is being taught without any reference to word counts, even
in spoken English, and without any predetermined plan. The emphasis at present is
neither on structure nor on word formation, but on the functions of language. It is too
early to tell now what will happen to the word formation of those under graduate students
being taught English in this way, or what the outcome of the whole approach is going to
be Kharma & Hajjaj (1989:36) .
96
I agree with Kharma & Hajjaj (1989:36) when they give their opinion on teaching the
word formation. They state that ― that whatever the approach to ELT or the method of
teaching EFL may be, word formation must have a prominent place in the overall plan of
TEFL.‖. Thus, they have reached their conclusion through observing during their long
years in teaching TEFL. The very important and simple fact that learners of English in a
non-English environment are opt to forget more words that those they can store and recall
either for speech or writing. There are several ways of forming words in English, but as
the most common ways are derivation, inflection and compounds. I will limit myself to
discuss the types of English compounds in general.
BACKGROUND
Compounds are groups of two or more elements treated as a unit. They consist of two or
more bases joined together without the use of derivational affixes. Compounds are either
primary or secondary Al-Jarf (2004). In a primary compound or base-compound, two
bases (derivationally bound forms) are joined together Al-Jarf (2004). In a secondary
compounds or stem-compound, both or all of the constituents of the compound are stems
(free forms) Al-Jarf (2004). Many derived forms are very complex, involving two or
more layers of derivation. The formation of larger compounds is generally based on those
of two-element compounds as light housekeeper is constructed from housekeeper and
light (house) Al-Jarf (2004).
Adjectives may be embedded in nominal constructions with no special marker (black

coffee). For analyzing embedded constructions, the term head is used to refer to the
centre of the construction, the term attribute for the modifier. An endocentric construction
is one in which the primary constituent or constituents are comparable to the complete
construction Al-Jarf (2004). An exocentric construction is one in which the primary
constituents do not function like the complete construction Al-Jarf (2004). The contrast
between endocentric and exocentric is present in compounds as well as in derivatives. If
the function of the compound is the same as that of one of its elements, it is to be classed
97
as endocentric. If the compound belongs to a form-class or subdivision of one different
from that of its elements, then it is exocentric Al-Jarf (2004).
Compounds constitute a considerable part of English vocabulary, and the process is very
productive in the sense that new compounds are being used daily in written texts. They
can also be virtually any part of speech. We do not only have compounds nouns such as
goldsmith, compound adjectives like seasick, and compound verbs like overcome, but
there are also compound pronouns such as yourself, adverbs like moreover, prepositions
such as in front of , conjunctions like whenever, numerals like twenty-five, and a
compound of indefinite such as another.(Kharma& Hajaj, 1989:48).The most disturbing
fact about English compounds is their irregularity and the high complexity of their
methods of composition, and of the syntactic and semantic relations that hold between the
elements composting each word.
The majority of English compound types are headed – especially, right –headed and the
heads of these compounds display the syntactic and semantic characteristics that are
expected of heads Maalej (1994). These compounds refer to classes of things and they
have used daily. Compounds play a role in the lexicon because they have the ability for
creating a class of noun phrase (NPs) intended for naming entities with no pre-existing
names. According to Downing (1977:823) cited in Maalej (1994) is characterized by
―packing a maximum amount of information into a minimal amount of linguistic
structure‖. Finin (1980:310) cited in Maalej (1994) claims that one of the characteristic
features of compounds in English is their semantic compactness, i.e. the covert nature of
the relations linking the head (the one which is modified and often occupies the right
most position in the nominal sequence) and the non-head (the modifier). Compounding
widen the range of combinational possibilities for the suffixes which create new meaning.
The following combinations of lexemes may exemplify such productivity: bathroom
towel rack, designer training program (Selkirk, 1982:5). It is found that major issues to be
studied in compounding are the generation, interpretation, and headedness of compound.
98
COMPOUNDS OF NOUNS
This kind of compound is considered the largest one because is divided into four main
categories with subdivisions.These categories are N.N, A.A, V.N and P.N. According to
Selkirk (1982:14) a compound noun could have a syntax like N.N (livingroom), A.N
(wellwisher), P.n (outbuilding and V.N (rattlesnake).N.N is divided into two word and
multi word. Two word is divided into non-deverbativity (nominal verbles compound),
deverbal with –er (nominal verbal compound), deverbal with (-ing,-ment.-ion), deverbal
with countable and the last one is deverbal with deriving preposition.The difference
between non-deverbal (nominal verbles compound) and deverbal with –er(nominal
verbale compound) is that the verbale element of non-devebativity (nominal verbless
compound is) is missing Dillon (1977:51), which means the headnoun of non
deverbativity does not take suffix like –er,-ing,-ment and –tion, but this kind of
compound consists of two sequences noun.noun and the interpretation of the noun
compounds depends on the relation that is understood between them.Another kind of
compounds of noun is the nominal verbal compound with suffixes to the headnoun
(deverbal). The headnoun of nominal verbal compounds is formed by adding the suffixes
–er, -tion, -ment, -ing to base verb to make deverbal noun. Dillon (1977) described this
kind of compound:―The sense of the compound can be at least roughly paraphrased as a
sentence in which the verb is the one underlying the second (deverbal noun ) and the first
plays some role in relation to it‖.
99
The figure below shows compound of nouns and its kinds:
Non-deverbativity
deverbal with -er
Tow-word deverbal with -ment, -tion
deverbativity
deverbal with countable
N.N Deverbal with Deriving preposition

Active compound
V.N
NC
P.N multi word
Passive compound
Figure 2. Categories of compound of nouns
COMPOUND OF ADJECTIVES
Compound adjectives are formed according to a large number of different patterns. They
consist of three categories noun, adjective, and preposition. According to Selkirk
(1982:14), ‗a compound adjective may consist of a noun, an adjective, or a preposition
followed by an adjective‘. As in the following example which are quoted from Selkirk. ―
NA (headstrong), AA (icy cold), PA (overwide)‖.Selkirk (1982:15).The figure below
shows compound of adjective according to Selkirk‘s theory
A A A
Figure 3. Kinds of compound of adjectives
100
COMPOUNDS OF VERBS
In relation to this kind of English compounds; Bauer (1983:207) cited Adems as saying:
―The majority of compound verbs in English are not formed by putting two lexemes
together to form a new verb, but by back-formation or conversion from compound noun‖.
According to Selkirk (1982:14), ― a compound of verb may consist of a preposition
followed by a verb‖ as in the following example which is quoted from Selkirk (1982:15),
‗outlive‘. So, this kind of English compound is different from compounds of noun and
compounds of adjective because it consists of two words namely a preposition and a verb
to produce one construction of compound which is compound of verb. The following
figure shows the kinds of compounds of verbs:
V P V
Figure 4. Kinds of compounds of verbs
SYNTACTIC AND SEMANTIC RELATIONS
As suggested by (Karma & Hajaj,1989: 49) that the syntactic relations that hold between
the elements of a compound noun, while semantic relations are unlimited in number. The
following sections give examples to illustrate the both cases:
(a) Syntactic relations
(i) syntactic word-group relations, e.g part of speech, son -in- law, good-for-
nothing and out-of-work
(ii) co-ordinations,e.g. bread and butter , gin and tonic
(iii) qualifier and noun, e.g. blackbird, bluebell
101
(iv) Adverb and verb, e.g, downpour, outlay, afterblast
(v) Adverb and noun,e.g, outpost
(vi) The first element may denote the subject, e.g, day-break
(vii) The first element may denote the object, e.g. bloodshed
(b) Semantic relations
(i) the first element denote place or time, e.g. headache, nightclub
(ii) the first element denote purpose, e.g. wineglass
(iii) the first element denote means or instrument, e.g. handwriting, sword-cut
(iv) the first element denote resemblance,e.g. goldfish
(v) the first element denote sex, e.g. manservant
THE STUDENTS' ROLES
1. A grouping method is useful to be used and adopted in learning English

compounds structures. Especially, those made of similar syntactic and
semantic relations. Grouping system can be expanded to cover all types of
compounds. As the students‘ stock of such compounds increases, the
grouping system can be refined to cater for finer differences in syntactic
and semantic relations between elements (Karma & Hajjaj, 1989:55).
2. Reading a daily newspaper can enlighten and enrich the students‘

capability to master many types of English compounds. Newspaper articles
represent materials, which are meant for public consumption. In other
words, the readers are not a specialized group of people; they are laymen.
As such these newspaper articles are expected to be of a more general
nature.
102
3. A student should read different types of newspaper articles, since they are
expected to be enough to yield all types of English compounds and, they
could provide them with different results for their investigation.
CONCLUSION
It has found that students often faced difficulty in their academic writing when they use
word formation. English words formations have many types and different semantic and
syntactic relations. The main reason teachers of English should pay much attention and
consideration to how to teach compounds in academic writing. And find best method
discuss the English words formation in the classroom. Personally, I have found that my
underground students have their weakness in constructing suitable compounds, especially
when these compounds link with adjective, nouns, adverb and prepositions.
REFERENCE
Al-Jarf, R. (2004). English Arabic Compounds for Translation Students, unpublished

paper.
Bauer, L. (1983). English word-formation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Dillon, L.G. (1977). Introduction to contemporary linguistic semantic. New Jersey. USA.
Downing, P. (1977). ―On the creation and use of English compound nouns‖, Language,
53: 4, pp.810-842.
Kadhim, A. K. (2004). Translating English Nominal Compounds into Arabic. M.A thesis.
University of Science Malaysia.
Kharm, N. & Hajjaj, A. (1989). Errors in English among Arabic grammar of the written
language. Harlow: Longman (13) group Ltd. UK.
Maalej, Z. (1994). ―English-Arabic machine translation of nominal compounds”. In

P.Bouillon & D. Estival (eds.), proceedings of the workshop on compound noun:
Multilingual Aspect of nominal composition. Geneva :ISSO, pp.135-146.
Selkirk, E.O. (1982). The syntax of words. Cambridge/Mass: The MTT Press
103
The Translation of BBC Political News into Arabic: Semantic Analysis
Abstract
This paper examines the quality of the messages in the Arabic translation of English
political news. Our data is pairs of English political news ST and their corresponding
Arabic TT. It aims to find the answers to the research question : Do the stylistic changes
affect the quality of the messages in the Arabic messages? .Towards that end, a
componential methodology of the ST and TT will be adopted by paying attention to
examine the differences and similarities of the content of the messages in the ST and their
corresponding messages in the TT. In the evaluation of the messages of the texts (both ST
and TT), Newmark‘s approaches in translation shall be used, in particular the employment
of his terminologies, overtranslation, undertranslation, and ambiguous translation and
other similar terminologies such as incorrect translation and replacement translation. In
addition, our observation of any difference in the messages of the ST and the TT (both the
linguistic meaning and the extra linguistic meaning) shall be stated using the semantic
notation of the componential analysis of Katz and Fodor (1963) and as extended in
Jackson (1988) where necessary. In some places in addition to the notation, a simple
supplemental narration shall be employed especially in dealing with cultural messages and
other nuances in the realm of pragmatics. It is found that the messages have merely been
diffused, or or being put in a time frame (tenses) to suit the culture, political make up, the
Arabic grammar and sociolinguistic idiosyncracies of the Arab target readers.
Key Words: translation, comparison, culture, style and componential analysis
Methodology
Newmark‟s Ideas in Newmark (1981, 1988).
As Newmark (1981: 7-8) rightly points out, the translator is a victim of a constant tension
between the acts of overtranslation and undertranslation. He contends that a lot of
semantic gaps in translated texts arise because of this tension. To him, overtranslation is
104
a translation that gives more detail and a more specific word than its corresponding
during the translation procedures. (Newmark, 1988:284). And undertranslation gives less
detail and is more general than the original. (Newmark, 1988: 285). In addition to
semantic and communicative translations approaches, ambiguous translation to Newmark
(1981:122) ―…carry a deal of lexical and grammatical ambiguity, which may be
linguistic or referential; hopefully all this ambiguity will be cleared up by the micro-and
macrocontext. Where the ambiguity remains in spite of the macrocontext, the translator
has to determine whether it is referential or linguistic, or between the two extremes,‖
(Newmark: 1981:122).
Regarding other approaches of translation, such as semantic and communicative

translation, Newmark (1981: 22) claims that in semantic translation the translator
attempts within to reproduce the precise contextual meaning of the author, while
communicative translation the translator attempts to produce the same effect on the TL
readers as was produced by the original on the SL readers. Also, to him word-for-word
translation transfers SL grammars and lexical words as well as the meaning of all the SL
words effectively into the translation. (Newmark, 1988:69). In addition, he defines free
translation as an approach that reproduces the matter without the manner during the
translation. It reproduces the content without the form of the original. He further defines
literal translation as a procedure in which the SL grammatical construction is converted
to his nearest TL equivalents but the lexical words are translated simply. (Newmark,
1988: 46).
Componential Analysis.
Denotive words and their meaning can be differentiated using the methods of
componential analysis as first propounded by Katz and Fodor (1963). Componential
analysis refers to a semantic analysis in which meanings of lexemes are analysed into
components, and which can be compared across lexemes or groups of lexemes. (Jackson,
1988:79). Components have distinguishing functions that are used to distinguish features
of lexemes within a specified semantic domain. (Jackson, 1988:81).
105
There are two general types of semantic component, namely common component and
diagnostic component. (Jackson, 1988: 83). A common component serves to identify a
semantic domain, where the distinguished component is shared by all the lexemes in the
domain. The second type is diagnostic. Katz and Fodor exemplified this contention with
the word bachelor which is (a) human, (b) male, and (c) unmarried. Such information
with respect to the word bachelor can be expressed by providing a list of three binary
components: [+ human], [ + male], and [- married] where the plus symbol [+ ] denotes
the presence of an information while the minus symbol [-] indicates the absence of such
information. In the case of hydra which is biologically both male and female, it carries
the information [+ male and –male] in which its unique characteristic can be stated as [ +
male ].
Jackson notes that componential analysis has a considerable history in the area of
phonology where it works reasonably and insightfully because phonology deals with a
small, limited system of sounds whose significance depends largely on contrasts with
other elements in the system. Thus, he continues to note that in English the phoneme /p/
,[-voiced], is distinguished from /b/, [+voiced], by the role of the vocal cords, and from
/f/ and /v/ , both [-stop], by the fact that the air stream in /p/ and /b/ is at one point
completely stopped. Therefore, it can be said that /p/ is [- voiced, + stop] while /f/ is [-
vioce, -stop]; and /b/ is [+voiced, +stop] while v is [+voiced, -stop]. Jacksons further
suggest that in keeping with its formalistic and reductionist program, generative grammar
has adopted the use of componential analysis in its study of meaning. By analogy with
the procedure of decomposing phonemes into distinctive binary phonological features,
we may decompose meanings of words and phrases (and perhaps clauses) into distinctive
binary meaning components such as [+male] or [- married] as in the case of bachelor
above. Words and their meaning can be differentiated when categorized into the general
semantic categories of synonym, antonym and hyponym. (Jackson, 1988: 91). Hence, he
contends that the area in which componential analysis is most beneficial as it can show
nuances of meaning of words in terms of synonymy, antonymy and hyponymy. For
example, he suggests that drawing pin (British English) and thumb tack (American
English) are considered a pair of true synonyms for they share the same set of semantic
106
component, for example both are [+ fastener, + pointed, + broad head, + for paper].
Antonyms, in general refer to words with opposite meanings; so while man and woman
may share many components such as [ + concrete, + animate, +human], the addition of
the component male shows that man [+ male] and woman [-male] are antonyms.(
Jackson,1988: 91). Hyponymy refers to the relation of the inclusion of meaning, such as
the relationship between father and mother, both of which are hyponyms of parent. With
regards to hyponymy, the pair share semantic components of the general meanings, but
one will have the specific meaning of the included item. (Jackson, 1988: 92) as cited in
Rokiah Awang (2000). For instance, man, woman, boy and girl share the component
human but do not share the components adult and male. So, he notes that man and
woman share the component adult while boy and girl share the component child. Thus, he
adds that man and woman are hyponyms of adult while boy and girl are hyponyms of
child and both adult and child are hyponyms of human beings.(Rokiah Awang, 2000).
In this paper, the foregoing manner of decomposing phonemes and words/phrases/clauses

of a language into their meaning components in terms of semantic features denoted by [+]
(present ) and [–] (absence) of a feature shall be used in this study wherever applicable as
notational techniques of changes of messages between those of the ST in English and
their corresponding messages in the TT Arabic translation.
Fishman Sociolinguistic Concept on Language Reflections.
One of the major lines of social and behavioral science interest in language during the
past century (as in the case of linguistic relativity known as Whorfian Hypothesis, Whorf
(1940, 1941) as cited in Fishman (1972:286) has been claimed that the radically differing
structures of the language of the world constrain the cognitive functioning of their
speakers in different ways, (Fishman,1972:286). Within the linguistic relativity view,
Fishman (1972) notes the following claim:
….the background linguistic system (in other words, the grammar) of

each language is not merely a reproducing instrument for voicing ideas
but rather is itself the shaper of ideas, the program and guide for the
individual‘s mental activity, for his analysis of impressions, for his
107
synthesis of his mental stock in trade. Formulation of ideas is not an
independent process, strictly rational in the old sense, but it is part of a
particular grammar and differs, from slightly to greatly, between
grammars seem to be overstated and no one-to-one correspondence
between grammatical structure either cognitive or socio-cultural structure
measured independently of language has ever been obtained. Fishman
(1972: 287).
To counter this view, Fishman (1972) opines that it is less likely that the entire language
or entire societies are classified in such general way. Consequently, he offers an
alternative sociolinguistic explanation and stresses that (a) languages primarily reflect
rather than create socio-cultural regularities in values and orientations and (b) that
languages through out the world share a far larger number of structural universals than
has heretofore been recognized. He argues and supports his contention by noting that,
The very concept of linguistic repertoire, role repertoire, repertoire range

and repertoire compartmentalization argue against such neat classification
once functional realities are bought into consideration. Any reasonably
complex speech community contains various speech networks that vary in
respect to the nature and ranges of their speech repertoires. Fishman (1972:
288 ).
Taken as a whole, Fishman‘s sociolinguistic views above holds that language is a

reflection of the socio-cultural and the values and orientations of its speakers rather than
it being regarded as a direct consequence or constraint of the cognition of its speakers.
On this point Fishman observes that there are ways in which lexicons and languages as a
whole are reflective of the speech communities that employ them and stresses further as
follows:
In a very real sense a language variety is an inventory of the concerns and

interests of those who employ it at any given time. If any portion of this
inventory reveals features not present in other portions this may be
indicative of particular stresses or influences in certain interaction
networks within the speech community as a whole or in certain role-
relationships within the community‘s total role-repertoire. Fishman
(1972: 296).
To support the above position, Fishman cites examples from Hebrew and Aramic terms
where they are retained not only for all traditional and sanctified objects but also with
108
certain Germanic elements in order to provide contarastive emphases; for example, bukh
‗book‘ versus. seyfer ‗religious book‘ , scholarly book‘; lerer ‗teacher‘ versus melamed
or rebi „teacher of religious subjects‘.(Fishman ,1972:297).
Relative to other theories on language such as generative grammar which is basically

cognitive such as in Culicover (1997), and from the viewpoint of language behavior and
social behavior, the language reflection view of Fishman is related to language as parole
(i.e., language as it is actually used) as well as related to the cultural variation and social
variation. (Fishman, 1972:299). Hence, it is quite obvious that Fishman favours the idea
that language is a reflection of the social organization and he points out that lexicons in
particular, and language as a whole, are reflective of the speech communities that
employs them. He, however, acknowledges that there are areas in language where the
linguistic relativity (i.e., the Whorfian Hypothesis) view may be observed such as in the
structuring of verbal interaction and the structure of lexical components.
Note:
For the purposes of expressing the grammatical categories, we shall be using the symbols
N (noun), V (verb), A (adjective), P (prepositions), Pro (pronoun), F (functional words).
For phrases and clauses, we shall use D‘ (determiner phrase), COMP (complementation),
Comp (complementizer), Conj (Conjunction) and IP (Inflectional phrase =sentence).
Data Analysis
Replacement Translation.
In this section, we will present seven cases of changes of the messages in the TT due to
stylistic changes that are within the preview of replacement translation. They are
presented in Tables 1.
Table 1 English-Arabic: Replacement Translation.
making it the fugitive al qa‘eda leader‘s first message since January. Politician
said it only…Ben Laden.
TT َ‫ح ضذ اال عال‬١‫ح غشت‬١‫ث‬١ٍ‫ زشب ص‬: ْ‫تٓ الد‬
/‫ش‬٠‫ٕا‬٠ ‫ُ اٌماػذج ِٕز‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫ي ٌضػ‬ٚ‫ اال‬ٛ٘ ٚ , ‫َ االزذ‬ٛ٠ ً١‫ح اٌرغد‬١‫شج اٌفضائ‬٠‫ لذ تثد لٕاج اٌدض‬ٚ
.., ٟٔ‫ْ اٌثا‬ٛٔ‫وا‬
Trs wa qad bathat qanat al jazeera al fadaeya al tasjeel youm al ahad, wa hua al
109
awal li za‟eem tandeem al qa‟eda munthu yanayeer / kanoon al thani
BT and al Jazeera channel aired the recording tape on Sunday , and this is the first
to leader organizing of al qa‘eda since January.
Style of ST the fugitive al Qa‘eda leader‘s : [D‘-D‘-D‘].
Style of TT ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫ ( ٌضػ‬literary: to leader organizing al qa‘eda): [P‘-[D‘-D‘]].
Differences ST :
between the the fugitive [+human, +fugitive, +hunted, villain];
semantic al qa‘eda [+N, -human, +al qaedah, +principle, +technique, +foundation];
features of ST leader [+N, +human, +leader, +guide, +direct ].
and the
semantic TT :
features of TL ُ١‫( صػ‬za‘eem) ‗leader‘ [+N, -animate, +human, +leader, +chief, +head,
+strongman];
ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandeem) ‗organizing‘ [+N, -A, -human, +organization, +regulation,
+arrange].
‫( اٌماػذج‬al qa‟eda) [+N, -human, +al qaedah, +principle, +technique,
+foundation];
Effect on There is difference in style and in semantic features.
message Due to those differences between the Arabic version ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( ٌضػ‬li za‟eem
tandeem al qa‟eda) ( literally: ‗to leader organizing al qa‟eda‟) and those in the
SL text ‗the fugitive al qa‘eda leader‘s‘, relatively the TT has replaced the
original message ‗fugitive‘ into ‗leader‘. Hence, it is a replacement translation.
We are concerned with the data the fugitive al qa‟eda leader‟s of the ST. It is a complex
nominal compound with a series of determiner phrases of the form of [D‘-D‘-D‘]. This
English ST has been translated and paraphrased into Arabic ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫ُ ذٕض‬١‫( ٌضػ‬li za‟eem
tandeem al qa‟eda) (literally: ‗to leader organizing al qa‘eda‘), which is also a complex
nominal compound with a combination of prepositional phrases and determiner phrases
of the form of [P‘-[D‘- D‘]]. Here, the preposition li ‗to‘ provide an emphatic sense as
well as binds the nouns cohesively. In the ST the semantic content of a fugitive [+N,
+human, +hunted, + al qaedah, +villain] has been changed into Arabic ُ١‫( صػ‬za‟eem)
‗leader‘ [ +human, +leader, +chief, +head, +organization, +strongman] in the TT. As
such the new content in the TT has been replaced in the original sense. The original sense
which is confined to a mere ‗…fugitive who is at the same time a leader of al qa‟eda
foundation‘ has been diffused and attached to a person who is the leader of al qa‟eda
organization. As a consequence the translator has given the word organizing a new
110
lexical word befitting Bin Laden‟s Foundation when translated. The word organizing is a
suitable lexical label as it would also be in accordance with the political understanding of
the Arabic readers as it commensurates with the personality of Bin Laden. Thus, in line
with Hatim‘s (1997) view of translating across different cultures/nations, both texts have
described the leader of al qa‟eda, Osama bin Laden, in different ways and according to
the respective cultural and political backgrounds of ST writer and TT translator.
Both of these words of the ST give different perceptions to the readers of the text since
both fugitive and leader have different scales of meaning in the sociolinguistic contextsof
the ST and the TT. In the word fugitive, Bin Laden is depicted as a man of chaos, crimes
and does not respect world international law. In the word leader, on the other hand, Bin
Laden is a potrayed as leader of the militia, the group or the party. The writer has given
two contrastive meaning: a fugitive but at the same time a leader. It is difficult for the
Arab readers to believe that a leader can be a fugitive unless he is an illegal leader or
killer. If so, then it is possible to describe him as a fugitive. In contrast, in the Arabic
version, the translator has changed the term the fugitive al Qaeda Leader into a new and
empathic term ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandeem) ‗organizing‘. In addition, the political term ‫( اٌماػذج‬al
qa‟eda) in the TT has been preceded with the noun ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandeem) „organizing‘. It is
noticed that the nominal compound denoting political sense in the ST text is preceded by
an adjective, fugitive, which has a different meaning compared to the one that is used to
describe the ‫( اٌماػذج‬al-qa‟eda) leader, Bin Laden, in the TT. This kind of replacement,
made by the translator, has affected the meaning of the message, from the negative
meaning that has been evoked by the word fugitive who is working in the al qa‟eda
militia into the positive meaning in the nominal compound construction in organizing al
qa‟eda ‫ُ اٌماػذج‬١‫( ذٕض‬tandeem al qaeda). This kind of change is quite in tandem with the
Arabic sociolinguistic contexts in the sense of Fishman (1972) where language is seen as
reflections of the society which speaks it.
The Arabic version shows that translator has omitted the translation of the word fugitive
and has replaced it with the word ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandeem) ‗organizing‘ as either the item is
untranslatable for a lack of equivalence in the target language, or the item might
111
ideologically or morally be unacceptable to the target reader due to a disagreement with
the meaning of the word fugitive in the ST, which conveys a bad impression about the
source culture. Thus, it is noticed that the main context that has been used to describe the
figure Bin Laden, has changed between both texts. The original author of the ST has
described Bin Laden as a fugitive while the TT translator has described him as
munadeem „organizer‘. Additionally, the translator has not provided the message with
any additional information concerning the word fugitive when he describe Bin Laden as
the ‫( اٌماػذج‬al qa‟eda) leader. Instead, he has given a different word ُ١‫( ذٕض‬tandeem)
‗organizing‘ to reflect a different meaning to that in the ST.
This stylistic change in the lexicality has made the readers of the TT feel that there is no
relevance between the ST description al qa‟eda fugitive leader and organizing al Qaeda
since the translator has not directly quoted the original message. Thus, stylistic change
has affected the whole message by the translator‘s giving another lexical word to reflect a
different meaning in the description of Bin Laden. This stylistic change of the English
compound structure can confuse the TT readers, since two texts have described Ben
Laden with different messages.
Incorrect Translation.
In this section, we will present seven cases of incorrect translation. They are presented
in Table 2:
First consider the text in Table 2below
Table 2 English-Arabic: Incorrect Translation.

ST Bolton appointed US envoy to UN
US president George W Bush has formally appointed John Bolton as US
ambassador to the United Nations, without waiting for approval from the
Senate.
TT ‫ االُِ اٌّرسذج‬ٜ‫اؽٕطٓ ٌذ‬ٌٛ ‫ثا‬ٛ‫ٌرٓ ِثؼ‬ٛ‫ٓ ت‬١١‫ذؼ‬

ُِ‫ اال‬ٜ‫ ٌذ‬ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ب االِش‬ٚ‫ ِٕصة إٌّذ‬ٟ‫ٌرٓ ف‬ٛ‫ْ ت‬ٛ‫ا خ‬١ّ‫ػ سع‬ٛ‫ ت‬ٛ١ٍ‫سج دت‬ٛ‫ خ‬ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ظ االِش‬١‫ٓ اٌشئ‬١‫ػ‬
.ٓ١١‫ اٌرؼ‬ٍٝ‫ ػ‬ٟ‫ى‬٠‫ش االِش‬ٛ١‫افمح ِدٍظ اٌؾ‬ِٛ ‫ْ أرظاس‬ٚ‫اٌّرسذج د‬
Trs ‟ayan al-raees al-amrikee gorg dabalyu bush rasmeeyan jon bulton fi manseb
112
al-mandub al-amrikee lada al-umam al-mutahida duna entedar muwafaqat
majles al-sheyoukh al-amrikee ‟la al-t‟yeen.
BT Appointed the American president george dabalyu bush formally jun bulton in
the post of the delegate American in the united states without waiting agreement
senate American on the nomination
Style of ST has formally appointed ; it has the structure [I‘ -adv- V‘].
Style of TT
ٓ١‫( ػ‬literally: ‗appointed‘) : [ V‘….]
Differences ST:
between the has appointed [+V, -past, +perfect, -N, -simple, +assign];
semantic
features of ST TT:
and the
semantic ٓ١‫ ػ‬a‟yana ‗appointed‘ [+V,-auxilliary, +past, +simple, +assign].
features of TT
Effect on There is a shift from a present perfect tense to a simple past tense.
message The SL text ‗has formally appointed‘, which is in the present perfect tense has
been changed into a simple past tense in the Arabic text: ٓ١‫( ػ‬literally:
appointed), Hence, it is an incorrect translation.
In the above data, we are concerned only with the translation of the English verb phrase
has formally appointed to the Arabic word ٓ١‫‟( ػ‬yana) ‗appointed‘. Here, the present
perfect tense has been translated as ٓ١‫‟( ػ‬yan) ‗appointed‘, which is past simple. In
particular, the translator has omitted the English adverb formally from its position as in
the ST in the Arabic translation yielding the verb ٓ١‫‟( ػ‬yan) only. Probably this has been
done deliberately by the translator as he attempts to move from a standard formal
Standard English text that is readable by the high class educated readers to an Arabic
translation that can be consumed by all class of readers. Here, it seems that the translator
does not respect the present perfect tense of the ST message when translating it. This
attitude may be accounted by the fact that in Arabic time is not dissected in the same
way. Instead, in Arabic the same sense may be achieved by using the simple past along
with appropriate adverbial markers to convey the meaning of the present perfect. This
kind of incorrect translation style is normally used when the translator wants to convey
only the gist of the ST message to the Arabic reading public in the TT taking cognizance
of the Arabic sociolinguistic situations, their cultural outlook and the social background
which are congruent with Hatim‘s (1997) views when translating across different cultures
and nations. On the whole, the Arabic version does not reflect the same formal language
113
of the original text resulting in its focusing on different aspects of the same message. One
possible alternative translation of the English ST is ..‫ظ‬١‫ٓ اٌشئ‬١‫ (ٌمذ ػ‬laqad „eiana al-
raees.. ) ‗ therefore appointed the pridendent‘.
Ambiguous Translation.
In this section, we will present four cases of ambiguous translation. They are presented
in Table 3 . In this study, a translation is considered ambiguous when the Arabic TT has
more than one interpretation and such duality or multiple interpretations do not occur in
its corresponding English ST.
We will consider the data in Table 3 below:
Table 3 English-Arabic: Ambiguous Translation.

But traders say that in the short term the price could rise as high as 75 per
barrel.
TT ‫ اٌز٘ة‬ٚ ‫ ذشفغ اعؼاس إٌفظ‬ٟٔ‫شا‬٠‫ اال‬ٌٕٞٚٛ‫اصِح اٌٍّف ا‬
‫ثا‬٠‫ص ِؼٗ لش‬ٚ‫ذ ِٓ االسذفاع تؾىً ذردا‬٠‫ اذداٖ اٌّض‬ٟ‫ذفغ االعؼاس ف‬١‫ذش ع‬ٛ‫ْ اْ اعرّشاس اٌر‬ٍٍٛ‫ ِس‬ٜ‫ش‬٠ ٚ
.ً١ِ‫الس ٌٍثش‬ٚ‫د‬57 ‫عؼش‬
Trs Wa yara muhalilun ana estemrar al-tawatr sa yadf‟ al-as‟ar fi etijah al-mazeed
min al-ertifa‟ bishakel tatjawaz m‟hu taqreeban s‟r 75 dular lil barmeel.
BT Analysts seeing that continuing the tension will push the prices in the high
direction and overtake the 75 dollar for each barrel.
Style of ST Traders : plural noun.
Style of TT ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬literally: ‗analysts‘ - a plural noun).
Differences ST:
between the traders (+N, +human, +dealer, +businessmen);
semantic
features of ST TT:
and the
semantic ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘ (a) (+N, +human, +analysts, +oil, -media);
features of TT (b) (+N, +human, +analyst, -oil, +media).
Effect on There is a dual interpretations of the TT:

message The first is (a) ‗analyst of petrol‘ and the second (b) is ‗analyst of political
news‘. Hence, it is a case of an ambiguous translation.
In the above data, we are concerned with the translation of the English word traders. This
English word in its plural form has been translated as ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘
which is also in the plural form. The original sense of the ST as found in But traders say
114
that …only means ‗traders of petrol‘. In the TT in the form of ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun)
‗analysts‘, however, the original single meaning germinates into a minimally dual
interpretations in the TT, namely (a) analysts such as analysts of media or general
political news in a country with features like [+analysts, -oil, +media] and (b) analyst of
the prices of petrol with features like [+analyst, +oil, -media]. The first refers to analyst
of general business, while the second refers to a different group of traders who are
concerned with selling or buying oil in the international oil markets. The choice of the
word ٍٍْٛ‫( ِس‬muhalilun) ‗analysts‘ in the TT has yielded a translation which potentially
contains ambiguous information and could create an ambiguous message for the readers
of the TT for as long as such information commensurate with the readers‘ political
culture, understanding and sociolinguistic background .
Conclusion
It has been found that the changes in the messages have been labelled ( replacement
translation, incorrect translation and ambiguous translation), the overall impact of the
ST messages have not been totally lost. Instead, it is found that the messages have
merely been diffused, extended or somewhat narrowed down or being put in a time frame
(tenses) to suit the culture, political make up, the Arabic grammar and sociolinguistic
idiosyncracies of the Arab target readers. That is, the diffusion, the extension, the
narrowing of information and changing the tenses that have been put in place by the
translator, the TT has become more readable to the Arabic readers. Of course, this is not
saying that some degrees of messages have not been ―lost‖ in the translating processes
due to different focus and perceptions of the same events by the translator compared to
the focus and perceptions of the ST writer.
References
Culicover, Peter. W. (1997). Principles and Parameters: An Introduction to Syntactic

115
Fishman, Jushua.. (1972), Sociocultural Organization: Language Constraints and
Newmark, Peter. (1981). Approach to Translation. Oxford: Pergamon Press,U.K

Newmark, Peter. (1988). A Text Book of Translation.New York: Prentice Hall. U.K.
Katz, Jerolled. and Fodor, Jerry. (1963), The Structure of a Semantic Theory, Languag,
39(2), pages: 170-210.
Jackson, Howard. (1988). Words and their Meaning. London: Longman. U.K.
Rokiah Awang. (2000).The Translation of English News into Malay in the Malay
Newspaper of Malaysia. Ph.D thesis, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Malaysia.
116
Shift in the Translating of Qur‘anic Text: Stylistic Variations
Abstract
This study examines the English translation of Quranic verses. It compares the Arabic ST
and the TT from two angles: the style and the message. The objectives are to find out the
nature of the stylistic changes that occur in the English translation, to evaluate if the
stylistic changes have affected the quality of the messages, to find out the translating and
the stylistic strategies that are likely to have been used by the translators. The study uses
a comparative method and employs eclectically some ideas from the translation theory,
structural (syntactic) theory, semantic theory, and stylistics. The study shows that the
changes in style are within the realm of syntax (sentences, clauses and phrases). Some
other stylistic changes are due to morphological functions (tenses and verb morphology).
Generally the changes in the message are attributable to a combination of causes, namely
the syntactic changes, the grammatical changes (especially tenses), the new lexical items
and phrases that are appropriate to the culture and sociolinguistic perceptions of the
English speaking. The translators are found to have employed a variety of translating
strategies, namely the semantic, literal, word for word translating strategies. The literal
translating strategy seems to be relatively predominant. That is, the translators seem to
have used all of the three translating strategies, but have done so eclectically.
Background
Vinay and Darbelnet (1995).
four procedures: (a) transposition (shift), (b) modulation, (c) equivalence, (d) adaptation
117
which are used whenever grammatical, lexical, structural or conceptional divergences are
required due to certain stylistic effects in the source text.
Transposition (Shift).
For Vinay and Darbelnet (1995:36) this involves replacing one word class with another
without changing the meaning of the message. They add that besides being a special
translation procedure, transposition can also be applied within a language. They note that
in translation there are two type of transposition: (a) obligatory transposition and (b)
optional transposition,
They also indicate that this method requires the translator to change the grammar of the
SL text; and the translator needs to shift the grammatical make-up of the SL to fit that of
the TL to achieve an equivalent effect or to produce the same effect on the readership of
the translation as was obtained on the readership of the original.
From a stylistic point of view, the base and the transposed expression do not necessarily
have the same value. Translators carry out a transposition if the translation obtained fits
better into the text or allows a particular nuance of style to be retained. The transposed
forms are generally more literary in character than the original (Vinay and Darbelnet,
1995:36).
Ghazala (1995).
118
(Ghazala, 1995:246).

Data Analysis
The data analysis is contained eight verses from Quran and their English versions by
Yousif Ali and Mohammed Marmaduke Pickthell
Ayah 1:
ِ ‫ة ٱٌ َّـ ِؼ‬
‫غ‬١ ِ ٠ ُٗ‫ َّالُٖ فَأََّٔ ۥ‬َٛ َ‫ ِٗ أََّٔ ۥُٗ َِٓ ر‬١ْ ٍَ‫ت َػ‬
ِ ‫ َػ َظا‬ٰٝ ٌَِ‫ ِٗ إ‬٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ُٗ‫ُع ٍُّ ۥ‬ َ ِ‫﴾ ُوز‬٤﴿ { al Haj surat)
.
Ali Translation:
(4) About the (Evil One) it is decreed that whoever turns to him for friendship, him will
he lead astray, and he will guide him to the Penalty of the Fire.
Pickthall Translation:
119
For him it is decreed that whoso taketh him for friend, he verily will
mislead him and will guide him to the punishment of the Flame.
It is noticed that both translations have been served the exact meaning in the Quran, but
in terms of translation, it found that both have used different lexical words. Ali‘s
translation used literal translation to the underlined Arabic words ِٗ ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ , since a direct
translation might not serve the intended meaning. It is noticed that the same translation
Picktall has used. Syntactically, both translations have respected the syntactic structure of
the Arabic text; therefore, if we look at the above ayah, it noticed that the word ِٗ ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ has
preceded by the conjunction ‗ ٚ ‗ (and) . Thus, both translators have used the same
conjunction in their translations. With regards to Ali‘s translation, it is noticed that the
English version is used the pronoun ‗he‘ with the irony ٗ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ( and guide); to refer to any
one who follows the Satan, would seduce him and lead him to the hell. This is not the
case in Pickthell‘s translation, where he (Pickthell) has not used the pronoun ‗he‘ with the
irony ٗ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ( and guide). Instead, he used the pronoun ‗he‘ at the start of the sentence ( he
verily will mislead him and will guide him..). It is a matter of repetitive that Ali‘s
translation has used to indicate directly and indirectly how bad if someone takes the Satan
as a companion. Semantically, both translations have translated the meaning of the irony
ٗ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ( and guide) literally to create an acceptable translation.
Ayah 2:
َُْٛ‫رَأْر‬َٚ ً١َ ِ‫َْ ٱٌـَّج‬ُٛ‫رَ ْمطَؼ‬َٚ ‫بي‬

َ ‫ٱٌغِّج‬
َ َُْٛ‫﴾ أَئَِّٕ ُى ُْ ٌَزَأْر‬٢٩﴿ { al-ankabut}
َٓ١ِ‫ص ِضل‬َّ ٰ ٌ‫ٱَّللِ إِْ ُوٕذَ َِِٓ ٱ‬
َّ ‫ة‬ ۟ ٌُ‫ال أَْ لَب‬
ِ ‫ا ٱ ْئزَِٕب ثِ َؼ َظا‬ٛ َ َٛ ‫ ُى ُُ ْٱٌ ُّٕ َى َغ ۖ فَ َّب َوبَْ َج‬٠‫ َٔب ِص‬ِٝ‫ف‬
ٓ َّ ِ‫ْ ِِ ِٓۦٗ إ‬َٛ‫اة ل‬
Ali Translation:
(29) Do you indeed approach men, and cut off the highway?- and practice wickedness
(even) in your councils? But his people gave no answer but this: they said: ― Bring us the
Wrath of Allah if you tell the truth‖
120
For come ye not in unto males, and cut ye not the road (for travellers), and commit ye not
abomination in your meetings? But the answer of his folk was only that they said: Bring
Allah's doom upon us if thou art a truth teller!
The irony in both versions has translated uses literal and one to one translations. If we
َّ ‫ة‬
look at Ali‘s translation to the ironical lexical words ِ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ِث َؼ َظا‬, we noticed that he has
used one to one translation to come up with exact meaning. This is unlike in Picktehell
ِ َّ ‫ة‬
translation where he has translated ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ثِ َؼ َظا‬into English uses literal translation , since
according to him, translated the above ironical structure might come up with better
equivalence . Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic style of word
order. If we look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical structure, it is found that
the structure has started with the lexical verb ‗bring‘ as a subject of the ironical structure
َّ ‫ة‬
ِ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ثِ َؼ َظا‬, then followed by the objective pronoun ‗us‘ referring to the unbelievers
when they (unbelievers) make fun of the prophet Loot; moreover, the noun ‫ة‬ ِ ‫( ثِ َؼ َظا‬the
punishment) is used with definite article referring to Allah‘s punishment in the hereafter.
This is almost similar in Picktehell‗s translation, where he also started his translation with
َّ ‫ة‬
the verbal sentence ‗bring‘ as a subject of the ironical structure ِ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ِث َؼ َظا‬. But the
difference is that in the location of the pronoun ‗us‘, where he located it at the end of the
ironical structure; consequently, it is noticed that the name of Allah comes after the verb
‗bring ‗then the lexical noun ‗doom‘ is indefinite in Picktehell ‗s translation.
Ayah 3:
ُٖ ْ‫ ْل ًۭغا ۖ فَجَ ِّلغ‬َٚ ِٗ ١ْ َٔ‫ أُ ُط‬ٝٓ ِ‫َب َوأ َ َّْ ف‬ٙ‫َ ْـ َّ ْؼ‬٠ ُْ ٌَّ َْ‫ ُِ ْـزَ ْىجِ ًۭغا َوأ‬ٰٝ ٌََّٚ ‫َزَُٕب‬٠ٰ ‫ ِٗ َءا‬١ْ ٍَ‫ َػ‬ٰٝ ٍَ‫إِ َطا رُ ْز‬َٚ ﴾٧﴿ {lukman}
ُ١ٍ ٌَِ‫ة أ‬
ٍ ‫ثِ َؼ َظا‬
.
Ali Translation:
(7) When Our Signs are rehearsed to such a one, he turns in both his ears: announce to
him a grievous Penalty.
121
And when Our revelations are recited unto him he turneth away in pride
as if he heard them not, as if there were a deafness in his ears. So
give him tidings of a painful doom.
The irony in both versions has translated literally. If we look at Ali‘s translation to the
ironical lexical word ِِ ُٖ ْ‫( فَجَ ِّلغ‬then give good news him), we noticed that he has used
literal translation strategy to come up with exact or better meaning. The same strategy
Picktehell has used when translated the ironical lexical word ِِ ُٖ ْ‫( فَجَ ِّلغ‬then give good
news him) ِinto
ِ English uses literal translation , since this translation might come up
with better equivalence . Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic. If we
look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical structure, it is found that the structure
has started with the lexical verb ‗then give good news him‘ as a complement verbal
phrase. Then followed by the objective pronoun ‗him‘ referring to the unbelievers when
they (unbelievers) ignored Allah‘s warnings. This unlike Picktehell‗s translation, where
he also started his translation with the conjunction ‗ so‘ an indication for the consequence
of the events. Furthermore, the verbal sentence ‗give‘ as a reference of the ironical
structureِِ ُٖ ْ‫فَجَ ِّلغ‬ (then give good news him) followed by the objective pronoun ‗him‘
referring to the unbelievers when they (unbelievers) ignored Allah‘s warnings. In both
translations, the difference is in the style of writing the beginning of the ironical
structural phrase. The first starts directly with the verb, while the second starts with the
conjunction ‗so‘ ;consequently, followed by the verb.
Ayah 4:
‫ ُغ‬٠‫ َجبء ُو ُُ إٌَّ ِظ‬َٚ ‫ ِٗ َِٓ رَ َظ َّو َغ‬١ِ‫زَ َظ َّو ُغ ف‬٠َ ‫ٌَ ُْ ُٔ َؼ ِّّغْ ُوُ َِّب‬َٚ َ‫ ُوَّٕب َٔ ْؼ َّ ًُ أ‬ٞ‫ َغ اٌَّ ِظ‬١ْ ‫صبٌِذب َغ‬
َ ًَّْ ‫َب َعثََّٕب أَ ْس ِغجْ َٕب َٔ ْؼ‬ٙ١ِ‫َْ ف‬ٛ‫َصْ طَ ِغ ُس‬٠ ُْ َُ٘ٚ
‫غ‬١
ٍ ‫ص‬ َّ
ِ َّٔ ِِٓ َٓ١ِّ ٌِ‫ا فَ َّب ٌٍِظب‬ٛ‫ل‬ٚ‫فَظ‬ ُ ُ
{ Fatir}
Ali Translation:
(37) Therein will they cry aloud (for assistance): ―Our Lord! Bring us out: we shall work
righteousness, not the (deeds) we used to do!‖- ―Did We give you long enough life so
that he would should receive admonition? And ( moreover) the warner came to you. So
taste you ( the fruits of your deeds): for the wrong-doers there is no helper.
122
And they cry for help there, (saying): Our Lord! Release us; we will do
right, not (the wrong) that we used to do. Did not We grant you a life
long enough for him who reflected to reflect therein ? And the warner
came unto you. Now taste (the flavour of your deeds), for evil-doers
have no helper.
۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( ِۖ فَ ُظ‬then taste you), we noticed that he has used literal
ironical lexical words ِِ ‫ا‬ٛ
translation strategy to come up with exact or better meaning. The same strategy
۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( ِۖ فَ ُظ‬then taste you),
Picktehell has used when translated the ironical lexical words ‫ا‬ٛ
ِinto
ِ English uses literal translation , since according to him, translated the above
ironical structure might come up with better equivalence . In addition, both paraphrases
between two brackets to the Arabic ironical word ‫ا‬ٛ ۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( ِۖ فَ ُظ‬then taste you) in both
versions is different. If we look at Ali‘s paraphrases, we noticed that he paraphrases the

ironical word ‫ا‬ٛ۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( فَ ُظ‬then taste you) into the fruits of your deeds. While in Pickthell‘s
translation, he paraphrases it as the flavour of your deeds. Syntactically, both translations

led into different syntactic. If we look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical
structure, it is found that the structure has started with the conjunction ‗ so ‗ , which is an
indication for the consequences of events. Then followed by the verb ‫ا‬ُٛ‫ل‬ٚ‫ فَ ُظ‬reflecting
similar lexical irony as in the Arabic text. In addition, the verb ‫ا‬ُٛ‫ل‬ٚ‫ فَ ُظ‬is an order action set
already by Allah to the unbelievers in the doomsday. This is unlike Picktehell‗s
translation, where he also start his translation with the adverb of time ‗now‘ an indication
for the consequence of the events. Then the verbal sentence ‗taste‘ as a verb order of the
۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( فَ ُظ‬then taste you) to the unbelievers when they (unbelievers)
ironical structure ‫ا‬ٛ
ignored Allah‘s warnings.
Ayah 5:
ُ١ِ ‫ص ٰ َغ ِغ ْٱٌ َج ِذ‬ َّ ُْٚ

ِ ٰٝ ٌَِ‫ُ٘ ُْ إ‬ُٚ‫ٱَّللِ فَٲْ٘ض‬ ِ ‫﴾ ِِٓ ص‬٢٩﴿ {al- Safat}
Ali Translation:
(23) Besides Allah, and lead them to the Way to the (fierce) Fire!
123
Instead of Allah, and lead them to the path to hell;
ironical lexical words ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them), we noticed that he has used literal
Picktehell has used when translated the ironical lexical words ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them)
ِinto
ironical structure might come up with better equivalence . Syntactically, both translations
structure, it is found that the structure has started with the conjunction ‗ and ‗ , which is
an indication for the consequences of events. Then followed by the verb lead‘ reflecting
similar meaning as in the Arabic text. In addition, the verb ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them)‫ ا‬is
an order action set already by Allah to the unbelievers in the doomsday. This is similar to
Picktehell‗s translation, where he also start his translation with the conjunction ‗and‘ an
indication for the consequence of the events. Then the verbal sentence ‗lead‘ as a verb
order of the ironical structure ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them) to the unbelievers when they
(unbelievers) ignored Allah‘s warnings.
Ayah 6:
ًًۭ ٍَُ‫ ُْ ظ‬ِٙ ِ‫ ِِٓ رَذْ ز‬َٚ ‫بع‬

ِ ٌَّٕ‫ ُْ ظٍَُ ًًۭ َِِّٓ ٱ‬ِٙ ِ‫ْ ل‬َٛ‫ُُ ِِّٓ ف‬ٌَٙ ِْ ُٛ‫َ ِؼجَب ِص فَٲرَّم‬٠ٰ ُٖ‫ٱَّللُ ثِِۦٗ ِػجَب َص ۥ‬ َ ٌِ‫﴾ ٰ َط‬١٦﴿ { al-Zumur}
َّ ُ‫ف‬ِّٛ ‫ُ َش‬٠ ‫ه‬
Ali Translation:
(16) They shall have Layers of Fire above them, and Layers (of Fire) below them: with
this does Allah warn off His Servants: ― O My Servants! Then fear you Me ! ―
They have an awning of fire above them and beneath them a dais (of
fire). With this doth Allah appal His bondmen. O My bondmen, therefore
fear Me!
124
ironic ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows), we noticed that he has used literal translation strategy to make the
meaning clearer and acceptable. The same strategy has adopted by Picktehell when he
translated the ironical lexical wordِِ into English uses literal translation, since according
to him, translated the above ironical structure might come up with better equivalence.
Both translation have used different lexical words which are different for the original
meaning. For Ali‘s translation, he has used the word ‗layers‘ to reflect similar meaning to
ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows). While Picktehell‘s translation has used ‗an wing‘ to reflect similar
meaning to ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows).In addition, Ali‘s translation has used the word ‗layers‘ twice
for the ironical word ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows).This is unlike Pickthell‘s translation where he used
the lexical word ‗an wing‘ and ‗beneath‘ to translate the ironical word ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows).
Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic. If we look at Ali‘s translation
to the underlined ironical structure, it is found that the structure has started with the
plurals lexical word ‗layers‘. This is unlike Pickthell‘s translation where he used a
singular word ‗an wing‘ and a formal preposition ‗ beneath‘ .
Ayah 7:
ُُ ٠‫ ُؼ ْٱٌ َى ِغ‬٠‫﴾ ُط ْق إَِّٔهَ أَٔذَ ْٱٌ َؼ ِؼ‬٢٤﴿ {al-dukhan}
Ali Translation:
(49) Taste you (this)! Truly were you mighty, full of honor!
(Saying): Taste! Lo! thou wast forsooth the mighty, the noble!
It is noticed that both translations have managed to transfer the intended meaning of the
ironical structure from Arabic text into English. But in terms of the process of translation,
it found that both have used similar main verb such as ‗taste‘ to translate the lexical word
‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste), but with clear differences to the surface structure of both translations. Ali‘s
125
translation used literal translation and overtranslation to the underlined Arabic ‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste),
since a direct translation might not serve the intended meaning. It is noticed that Pickthall
has used overtranslation to the ironical structure ‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste). The translation in Pickthall
has implied by using two external lexical words such as ‗saying‘ and ‗ Lo‘ in order to
respect the intended meaning of the Arabic ironical structure . Syntactically, both
translations have respected the syntactic structure of the Arabic text. If we look at the
above ayah, it noticed that the word ‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste), is an order and obligatory verb used to
punish the unbelievers in the doomsday. Both Ali and Pickthall‘s translations have
adopted different word order when translated the irony in the above ayat into English. ِِ
In Ali‘s translation, it is noticed that the English version is started with the irony the main
verb ‗taste‘ then followed by the pronoun ‗you‘ . This is not the case in Pickthell‘s
translation, where he (Pickthell) has not used the pronoun ‗you‘ with the irony ‫ ُط ْق‬,
(taste). Instead, he has started with two continuous verbs. The first verb is ‗saying‘ which
is present continuous tense, while he second, is the simple present verb such as ‗taste‘
then followed two exclamation marks ‗ ! ‗ to the lexical word ‗taste‘ and ‗ Lo ‗ .
Ayah 8:
ِ ٍَٰ َ‫ ث‬ٜ‫ ِظً ِط‬ٰٝ ٌَِ‫ ۟ا إ‬ٛٓ ُ‫﴾ ٱٔطٍَِم‬۰٢﴿ { al- murselat}
ٍ ‫ث ُك َؼ‬
‫ت‬
Ali Translation:
(30) Depart you to a Shadow ( of smoke ascending ) in three columns
Depart unto the shadow falling threefold,
ironic ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadow), we noticed that he has used literal translation strategy to make the
126
Both translations have used different lexical words which are similar the original
meaning. For Ali‘s translation, he has used the word ‗a shadow‘ with overtranslation such
as a Shadow ( of smoke ascending ) between two brackets to clarify the meaning in the
original text. . While Picktehell‘s translation has used ‗the shadow‘ to reflect similar
meaning to ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadow). Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic
structure. If we look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical structure ً‫( ِظ‬shadow),
it is noticed that the structure has started with the indefinite article ‗a‘, to make the place
of shadow unidentified , since it could be too many shadows in the hell; to punish the
unbelievers. That the unbelievers might run to any shadow, thought can help them from
the punishment . This is unlike Pickthall‘s translation where he used the definite article
‗the‘ to the ironical structure ً‫( ِظ‬the shadow) .
Conclusion
Generally the changes in the message of the ironical sentences are attributable to a
combination of causes, namely the syntactic changes, the grammatical changes
(especially tenses), the new lexical items and phrases that are appropriate to the culture
and sociolinguistic perceptions of the English speaking. The translators are found to have
employed a variety of translating strategies, namely the semantic, literal, word for word
translating strategies. The literal translating strategy seems to be relatively predominant.
That is, the translators seem to have used all of the three translating strategies, but have
done so eclectically.
References


127
Semantic and Syntactic Analysis when translating Irony in the Quranic Texts: A
Contrastive Study of Yousif Ali and Pickthell English Translations
Abstract
The main idea of this paper is that the translation of irony from Arabic into English in
Quranic texts might create different translational strategies. The way Arabic and their
English translations reflect the linguistic and cultural distance between both languages.
To tackle this problem, the study ventures into a contrastive analysis with reference to a
number of linguistic and non-linguistic devices and concepts. It concentrates on the
interpretation and the linguistic realization of irony in both languages. The study takes the
view that ironic devices are the foundation of the structural development of the texts in
question. To demonstrate this, the speech act and conversational theories shall be used.
The interaction between the ironic devices and the text development constitute a
framework for the overall rhetorical meaning of the text. Thus, contrastive analysis and
comparative stylistics analysis will be implemented. A through contrastive analysis is
made of when translating irony from Arabic into English using two versions of
translations; the first translation by Yousif Ali and the second by Mohammed
Marmaduke Pickthall. Similarities and differences between both texts are found In
addition, both Yousif Ali and Mohammed Marmaduke Pickthall translations have used
different translational strategies in translating the ironical structures. Finally,
discrepancies were observed in the lexical form and function. Towards that end, this
linguistic or verbal communication between God and Allah create mutual understanding
through the use of human language common to both parties. Additionally, the will of
Allah is to open up a direct communication between Him and mankind manifests itself,
according to the Qur‘an, in the form of His sending down the ayat (verses).
Key words: semantic, syntax, translational strategies, figure of speech
Introduction
The first problem that arises when studying irony is that of its definition. Nowadays, most
critics agree that the old concept of irony as ― saying one thing and meaning another‖ is
128
no longer a comprehensive or accurate description of multifarious and complex
techniques that writers use to create irony Mateo (1995). On the other hand, irony and in
particular verbal irony, is not something that can be recognized by a fixed set of linguistic
or stylistic features Mateo (1995). There is no recognizable ironic tone or style. Irony
depends on context. Just as there are no words or expressions which are humorous per se
but by reason of their semantic or syntactic use in a context and which , as Walter Nash
puts it, will have to be defined ―extrinsically‖ by their contextual linkages and semantic
relationships Mateo (1995). So irony depends on context since it springs from the
relationship of a word expression or action with the whole text or situation. Mateo (1995)
Irony is a model that has been constantly used in literature. However, the study of irony
has not matched its prevalence in literature (Chackhachiro, 1997:8). This stems, at least
in the western world, from the fact that irony is taken for granted or , as Muecke (1969:
ix) put it ―…to be able to be ironical is perhaps part of the definition of our [ Western]
civilization…‖. Another factor may well be that irony is such a highly rhetorical and
elusive tool that it is difficult to defense in terms of its interpretation let alone style and
language, (Chackhachiro, 1997:8). In his attempts to describe the variable features that
affect the quality of irony, Muecke (1982: 52-55) as cited in (Chackhachiro, 1997:8)
recognizes for ironists ― …to break with advantage the rules of art‖ in order to enhance
irony. Muecke suggests four principles for a successful irony based on his observation
that ― A rhetorical effective, an aesthetically pleasing, or simply a striking irony owes its
success, it would seem, largely to one or more of a small number of principles and
factors‖, (Chackhachiro, 1997:8).
These principles are 1) the principle of economy, which implies the use of a few signals;
it is used in parody, advice and encouragement, the rhetorical question and other ironical
tactics; 2) the principles of high contrast (Chackhachiro, 1997:8). This takes place when
―…there is a disparity between what might be expected and what actually happened.‖
Muecke (1982:53), or when there is antithesis, semotactic anomalies or internal
contradiction; 3) the position of the audience, particularly in the theater where ― the
quality of the irony depends very much on whether the audience already knows the
outcome or true state of affairs or learns of these only when the victim learns.‖ Muecke
129
(1982:54) the topic- this factor or principle relates to the importance of emotions in
generating and enhancing both the observer‘s feeling toward the victim or the topic of
the irony and the reader‘s awareness and appreciation of the irony on an equal footing
among ―….the areas in which most emotional capital is invested: religion, love, morality
politics and history‖ Muecke (1982:55) .
Studies devoted to irony in English have all tackled the concept from a literary
perspective e.g Booth (1974), Handwerk (1985), Finaly (1990), Muecke (1969), Muir
(1990) as cited in (Chackhachiro, 1997:9). . The Arabic literary theorists, on other hand
have not given the same comprehension account to irony as their English counterparts,
especially in modern times. Instead there are many Arab writers who wrote on literary
criticism theory of ancient such as al-Jahiz, Ibn al-Muqaffa and Ibn Khaldun, as well as
reprints of those literary writers‘ and linguists‘ actual writings (Chackhachiro, 1997:9).
This lack of modern studies on the topic of irony does not take anything away from the
richness an importance of ancient Arab writers, especially Al-Jahiz, (Chackhachiro,
1997:9).
Data Analysis
The data analysis is contained eight verses from Quran and their English versions by
Yousif Ali and Mohammed Marmaduke Pickthell
Ayah 1:
ِ ‫ة ٱٌ َّـ ِؼ‬
‫غ‬١ ِ ٠ ُٗ‫ َّالُٖ فَأََّٔ ۥ‬َٛ َ‫ ِٗ أََّٔ ۥُٗ َِٓ ر‬١ْ ٍَ‫ت َػ‬
ِ ‫ َػ َظا‬ٰٝ ٌَِ‫ ِٗ إ‬٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ُٗ‫ُع ٍُّ ۥ‬ َ ِ‫﴾ ُوز‬٤﴿ { al Haj surat)
.
Ali Translation:
(4) About the (Evil One) it is decreed that whoever turns to him for friendship, him will
he lead astray, and he will guide him to the Penalty of the Fire.
For him it is decreed that whoso taketh him for friend, he verily will
mislead him and will guide him to the punishment of the Flame.
130
It is noticed that both translations have been served the exact meaning in the Quran, but
in terms of translation, it found that both have used different lexical words. Ali‘s
translation used literal translation to the underlined Arabic words ِٗ ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ , since a direct
translation might not serve the intended meaning. It is noticed that the same translation
Picktall has used. Syntactically, both translations have respected the syntactic structure of
the Arabic text; therefore, if we look at the above ayah, it noticed that the word ِٗ ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ has
preceded by the conjunction ‗ ٚ ‗ (and) . Thus, both translators have used the same
conjunction in their translations. With regards to Ali‘s translation, it is noticed that the
English version is used the pronoun ‗he‘ with the irony ٗ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ( and guide); to refer to any
one who follows the Satan, would seduce him and lead him to the hell. This is not the
case in Pickthell‘s translation, where he (Pickthell) has not used the pronoun ‗he‘ with the
irony ٗ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ( and guide). Instead, he used the pronoun ‗he‘ at the start of the sentence ( he
verily will mislead him and will guide him..). It is a matter of repetitive that Ali‘s
translation has used to indicate directly and indirectly how bad if someone takes the Satan
as a companion. Semantically, both translations have translated the meaning of the irony
ٗ٠‫ ِض‬ْٙ َ٠َٚ ( and guide) literally to create an acceptable translation.
Ayah 2:
َُْٛ‫رَأْر‬َٚ ً١َ ِ‫َْ ٱٌ َّـج‬ُٛ‫رَ ْمطَؼ‬َٚ ‫بي‬

َ ‫ٱٌغِّج‬
َ َُْٛ‫﴾ أَئَِّٕ ُى ُْ ٌَزَأْر‬٢٩﴿ { al-ankabut}
َٓ١ِ‫ص ِضل‬َّ ٰ ٌ‫ٱَّللِ إِْ ُوٕذَ َِِٓ ٱ‬َّ ‫ة‬ ۟ ٌُ‫ال أَْ لَب‬
ِ ‫ا ٱ ْئزَِٕب ثِ َؼ َظا‬ٛ َ َٛ ‫ ُى ُُ ْٱٌ ُّٕ َى َغ ۖ فَ َّب َوبَْ َج‬٠‫ َٔب ِص‬ِٝ‫ف‬
ٓ َّ ِ‫ْ ِِ ِٓۦٗ إ‬َٛ‫اة ل‬
Ali Translation:
(29) Do you indeed approach men, and cut off the highway?- and practice wickedness
(even) in your councils? But his people gave no answer but this: they said: ― Bring us the
Wrath of Allah if you tell the truth‖
For come ye not in unto males, and cut ye not the road (for travellers), and commit ye not
abomination in your meetings? But the answer of his folk was only that they said: Bring
Allah's doom upon us if thou art a truth teller!
131
The irony in both versions has translated uses literal and one to one translations. If we
َّ ‫ة‬
look at Ali‘s translation to the ironical lexical words ِ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ِث َؼ َظا‬, we noticed that he has
used one to one translation to come up with exact meaning. This is unlike in Picktehell
ِ َّ ‫ة‬
translation where he has translated ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ثِ َؼ َظا‬into English uses literal translation , since
according to him, translated the above ironical structure might come up with better
equivalence . Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic style of word
order. If we look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical structure, it is found that
the structure has started with the lexical verb ‗bring‘ as a subject of the ironical structure
َّ ‫ة‬
ِ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ثِ َؼ َظا‬, then followed by the objective pronoun ‗us‘ referring to the unbelievers
ِ ‫( ثِ َؼ َظا‬the
when they (unbelievers) make fun of the prophet Loot; moreover, the noun ‫ة‬
punishment) is used with definite article referring to Allah‘s punishment in the hereafter.
This is almost similar in Picktehell‗s translation, where he also started his translation with
َّ ‫ة‬
the verbal sentence ‗bring‘ as a subject of the ironical structure ِ‫ٱَّلل‬ ِ ‫ ٱ ْئزَِٕب ِث َؼ َظا‬. But the
difference is that in the location of the pronoun ‗us‘, where he located it at the end of the
ironical structure; consequently, it is noticed that the name of Allah comes after the verb
‗bring ‗then the lexical noun ‗doom‘ is indefinite in Picktehell ‗s translation.
Ayah 3:
ُٖ ْ‫ ْل ًۭغا ۖ فَجَ ِّلغ‬َٚ ِٗ ١ْ َٔ‫ أُ ُط‬ٝٓ ِ‫َب َوأ َ َّْ ف‬ٙ‫َ ْـ َّ ْؼ‬٠ ُْ ٌَّ َْ‫ ُِ ْـزَ ْىجِ ًۭغا َوأ‬ٰٝ ٌََّٚ ‫َزَُٕب‬٠ٰ ‫ ِٗ َءا‬١ْ ٍَ‫ َػ‬ٰٝ ٍَ‫إِ َطا رُ ْز‬َٚ ﴾٧﴿ {lukman}
ُ١ٍ ٌَِ‫ة أ‬
ٍ ‫ثِ َؼ َظا‬
.
Ali Translation:
(7) When Our Signs are rehearsed to such a one, he turns in both his ears: announce to
him a grievous Penalty.
And when Our revelations are recited unto him he turneth away in pride
as if he heard them not, as if there were a deafness in his ears. So
give him tidings of a painful doom.
ironical lexical word ِِ ُٖ ْ‫( فَجَ ِّلغ‬then give good news him), we noticed that he has used
132
literal translation strategy to come up with exact or better meaning. The same strategy
Picktehell has used when translated the ironical lexical word ِِ ُٖ ْ‫( فَجَ ِّلغ‬then give good
news him) ِinto
ِ English uses literal translation , since this translation might come up
with better equivalence . Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic. If we
look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical structure, it is found that the structure
has started with the lexical verb ‗then give good news him‘ as a complement verbal
phrase. Then followed by the objective pronoun ‗him‘ referring to the unbelievers when
they (unbelievers) ignored Allah‘s warnings. This unlike Picktehell‗s translation, where
he also started his translation with the conjunction ‗ so‘ an indication for the consequence
of the events. Furthermore, the verbal sentence ‗give‘ as a reference of the ironical
structureِِ ُٖ ْ‫فَجَ ِّلغ‬ (then give good news him) followed by the objective pronoun ‗him‘
referring to the unbelievers when they (unbelievers) ignored Allah‘s warnings. In both
translations, the difference is in the style of writing the beginning of the ironical
structural phrase. The first starts directly with the verb, while the second starts with the
conjunction ‗so‘ ;consequently, followed by the verb.
Ayah 4:
‫ ُغ‬٠‫ َجبء ُو ُُ إٌَّ ِظ‬َٚ ‫ ِٗ َِٓ رَ َظ َّو َغ‬١ِ‫َزَ َظ َّو ُغ ف‬٠ ‫ٌَ ُْ ُٔ َؼ ِّّغْ ُوُ َِّب‬َٚ َ‫ ُوَّٕب َٔ ْؼ َّ ًُ أ‬ٞ‫ َغ اٌَّ ِظ‬١ْ ‫صبٌِذب َغ‬
َ ًَّْ ‫َب َعثََّٕب أَ ْس ِغجْ َٕب َٔ ْؼ‬ٙ١ِ‫َْ ف‬ٛ‫َصْ طَ ِغ ُس‬٠ ُْ َُ٘ٚ
‫غ‬١
ٍ ‫ص‬ ِ َّٔ ِِٓ َٓ١ِّ ٌِ‫ا فَ َّب ٌٍِظَّب‬ُٛ‫ل‬ٚ‫فَ ُظ‬
{ Fatir}
Ali Translation:
(37) Therein will they cry aloud (for assistance): ―Our Lord! Bring us out: we shall work
righteousness, not the (deeds) we used to do!‖- ―Did We give you long enough life so
that he would should receive admonition? And ( moreover) the warner came to you. So
taste you ( the fruits of your deeds): for the wrong-doers there is no helper.
And they cry for help there, (saying): Our Lord! Release us; we will do
right, not (the wrong) that we used to do. Did not We grant you a life
long enough for him who reflected to reflect therein ? And the warner
came unto you. Now taste (the flavour of your deeds), for evil-doers
have no helper.
133
۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( ِۖ فَ ُظ‬then taste you), we noticed that he has used literal
ironical lexical words ِِ ‫ا‬ٛ
۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( ِۖ فَ ُظ‬then taste you),
Picktehell has used when translated the ironical lexical words ‫ا‬ٛ
ِinto
ironical structure might come up with better equivalence . In addition, both paraphrases
between two brackets to the Arabic ironical word ‫ا‬ٛ ۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( ِۖ فَ ُظ‬then taste you) in both
versions is different. If we look at Ali‘s paraphrases, we noticed that he paraphrases the

ironical word ‫ا‬ٛ۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( فَ ُظ‬then taste you) into the fruits of your deeds. While in Pickthell‘s
translation, he paraphrases it as the flavour of your deeds. Syntactically, both translations

structure, it is found that the structure has started with the conjunction ‗ so ‗ , which is an
indication for the consequences of events. Then followed by the verb ‫ا‬ُٛ‫ل‬ٚ‫ فَ ُظ‬reflecting
similar lexical irony as in the Arabic text. In addition, the verb ‫ا‬ُٛ‫ل‬ٚ‫ فَ ُظ‬is an order action set
already by Allah to the unbelievers in the doomsday. This is unlike Picktehell‗s
translation, where he also start his translation with the adverb of time ‗now‘ an indication
for the consequence of the events. Then the verbal sentence ‗taste‘ as a verb order of the
۟ ُ‫ل‬ٚ‫( فَ ُظ‬then taste you) to the unbelievers when they (unbelievers)
ironical structure ‫ا‬ٛ
ignored Allah‘s warnings.
Ayah 5:
ُ١ِ ‫ص ٰ َغ ِغ ْٱٌ َج ِذ‬ َّ ِْ ُٚ‫﴾ ِِٓ ص‬٢٩﴿ {al- Safat}

ِ ٰٝ ٌَِ‫ُ٘ ُْ إ‬ُٚ‫ٱَّللِ فَٲْ٘ض‬
Ali Translation:
(23) Besides Allah, and lead them to the Way to the (fierce) Fire!
Instead of Allah, and lead them to the path to hell;
ironical lexical words ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them), we noticed that he has used literal
134
Picktehell has used when translated the ironical lexical words ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them)
ِinto
ironical structure might come up with better equivalence . Syntactically, both translations
structure, it is found that the structure has started with the conjunction ‗ and ‗ , which is
an indication for the consequences of events. Then followed by the verb lead‘ reflecting
similar meaning as in the Arabic text. In addition, the verb ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them)‫ ا‬is
an order action set already by Allah to the unbelievers in the doomsday. This is similar to
Picktehell‗s translation, where he also start his translation with the conjunction ‗and‘ an
indication for the consequence of the events. Then the verbal sentence ‗lead‘ as a verb
order of the ironical structure ُْ ُُ٘ٚ‫( فَٲ ْ٘ض‬then guide them) to the unbelievers when they
(unbelievers) ignored Allah‘s warnings.
Ayah 6:
ًًۭ ٍَُ‫ ُْ ظ‬ِٙ ِ‫ ِِٓ رَذْ ز‬َٚ ‫بع‬

ِ ٌَّٕ‫ ُْ ظٍَُ ًًۭ َِِّٓ ٱ‬ِٙ ِ‫ْ ل‬َٛ‫ُُ ِِّٓ ف‬ٌَٙ ِْ ُٛ‫َ ِؼجَب ِص فَٲرَّم‬٠ٰ ُٖ‫ٱَّللُ ثِِۦٗ ِػجَب َص ۥ‬ َ ٌِ‫﴾ ٰ َط‬١٦﴿ { al-Zumur}
َّ ُ‫ف‬ِّٛ ‫ُ َش‬٠ ‫ه‬
Ali Translation:
(16) They shall have Layers of Fire above them, and Layers (of Fire) below them: with
this does Allah warn off His Servants: ― O My Servants! Then fear you Me ! ―
They have an awning of fire above them and beneath them a dais (of
fire). With this doth Allah appal His bondmen. O My bondmen, therefore
fear Me!
ironic ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows), we noticed that he has used literal translation strategy to make the
135
Both translation have used different lexical words which are different for the original
meaning. For Ali‘s translation, he has used the word ‗layers‘ to reflect similar meaning to
ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows). While Picktehell‘s translation has used ‗an wing‘ to reflect similar
meaning to ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows).In addition, Ali‘s translation has used the word ‗layers‘ twice
for the ironical word ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows).This is unlike Pickthell‘s translation where he used
the lexical word ‗an wing‘ and ‗beneath‘ to translate the ironical word ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadows).
Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic. If we look at Ali‘s translation
to the underlined ironical structure, it is found that the structure has started with the
plurals lexical word ‗layers‘. This is unlike Pickthell‘s translation where he used a
singular word ‗an wing‘ and a formal preposition ‗ beneath‘ .
Ayah 7:
ُُ ٠‫ ُؼ ْٱٌ َى ِغ‬٠‫﴾ ُط ْق إَِّٔهَ أَٔذَ ْٱٌ َؼ ِؼ‬٢٤﴿ {al-dukhan}
Ali Translation:
(49) Taste you (this)! Truly were you mighty, full of honor!
(Saying): Taste! Lo! thou wast forsooth the mighty, the noble!
It is noticed that both translations have managed to transfer the intended meaning of the
ironical structure from Arabic text into English. But in terms of the process of translation,
it found that both have used similar main verb such as ‗taste‘ to translate the lexical word
‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste), but with clear differences to the surface structure of both translations. Ali‘s
translation used literal translation and overtranslation to the underlined Arabic ‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste),
since a direct translation might not serve the intended meaning. It is noticed that Pickthall
has used overtranslation to the ironical structure ‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste). The translation in Pickthall
has implied by using two external lexical words such as ‗saying‘ and ‗ Lo‘ in order to
respect the intended meaning of the Arabic ironical structure . Syntactically, both
translations have respected the syntactic structure of the Arabic text. If we look at the
136
above ayah, it noticed that the word ‫ ُط ْق‬, (taste), is an order and obligatory verb used to
punish the unbelievers in the doomsday. Both Ali and Pickthall‘s translations have
adopted different word order when translated the irony in the above ayat into English. ِِ
In Ali‘s translation, it is noticed that the English version is started with the irony the main
verb ‗taste‘ then followed by the pronoun ‗you‘ . This is not the case in Pickthell‘s
translation, where he (Pickthell) has not used the pronoun ‗you‘ with the irony ‫ ُط ْق‬,
(taste). Instead, he has started with two continuous verbs. The first verb is ‗saying‘ which
is present continuous tense, while he second, is the simple present verb such as ‗taste‘
then followed two exclamation marks ‗ ! ‗ to the lexical word ‗taste‘ and ‗ Lo ‗ .
Ayah 8:
ِ ٍَٰ َ‫ ث‬ٜ‫ ِظً ِط‬ٰٝ ٌَِ‫ ۟ا إ‬ٛٓ ُ‫﴾ ٱٔطٍَِم‬۰٢﴿ { al- murselat}
ٍ ‫ث ُك َؼ‬
‫ت‬
Ali Translation:
(30) Depart you to a Shadow ( of smoke ascending ) in three columns
Depart unto the shadow falling threefold,
ironic ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadow), we noticed that he has used literal translation strategy to make the
Both translations have used different lexical words which are similar the original
meaning. For Ali‘s translation, he has used the word ‗a shadow‘ with overtranslation such
as a Shadow ( of smoke ascending ) between two brackets to clarify the meaning in the
original text. . While Picktehell‘s translation has used ‗the shadow‘ to reflect similar
meaning to ًًۭ ٍَُ‫( ظ‬shadow). Syntactically, both translations led into different syntactic
structure. If we look at Ali‘s translation to the underlined ironical structure ً‫( ِظ‬shadow),
137
it is noticed that the structure has started with the indefinite article ‗a‘, to make the place
of shadow unidentified , since it could be too many shadows in the hell; to punish the
unbelievers. That the unbelievers might run to any shadow, thought can help them from
the punishment . This is unlike Pickthall‘s translation where he used the definite article
‗the‘ to the ironical structure ً‫( ِظ‬the shadow) .
Conclusion
This study aimed at finding the main translational strategies when translating irony n
Qur‘anic texts into English. The attempt has proved that the translation of irony is as
elusive as the concept itself; it has also emphasized, once more, the impossible task of
suggesting a perspective approach to translation based on the features of any number of
texts. The analysis of eight Qur‘anic verses was then followed by a contrastive analysis.
This was meant to point out the similarities and differences with a focus on the latter
which I believe, is the crux of any translation study. The analysis has also proved the
necessity of the linguistic approach to translating irony from Arabic into English. Arabic
and English texts have shown some similar rhetorical, grammatical and lexical use of
devices, text strategies and rhetorical meaning. However, the difference was most clear at
the level of textual realization. This was reflected in the discrepancy in the functions and
number of devices in both languages. These restrictions are imposed by each language‘
repertoire and culture. Thus, the cases at hand have shown that that the meaning of the
irony in both translations has translated either by literal translation or paraphrases
strategies. Thus, the task of finding strategies for translation equivalence becomes a
matter of finding equivalent surface realizations that reflect equivalent function. In other
words, each language has a preference of usage but both prove to have common features.
Reference
Chackhachiro, R. (1997). The Translation of Irony in Australian Commentary Political

Texts from English into Arabic.Ph.D thesis, University of Western Sydney Macarthur.
Mateo, M. (1995), The Translation of Irony, Meta, XL. 1,
Muecke, D.C. (1969). The compass of Irony. London: Methuen.
138
Muecke, D. C. (1982). Irony and the Ironic. London: Methuen.
139
Stylistic changes and Corresponding Semantic Shifts in Arabic Translation of
Political news.
Abstract
This paper examines the changes in the style when translating BBC news into Arabic .
Our data are pairs of English political news ST and their corresponding Arabic TT. It aims
to find the answer to the research question in: What are the stylistic changes that occur
when translating English BBC news into Arabic?. Towards that end, a comparative
methodology by Vinay and Darbelnet (1995) and Ghazala (1995) will be adopted by
paying attention to examine the stylistic changes in the TT. The changes of the style in the
Arabic translation could be attributable to many reasons. In this paper, we are focusing
our attention to the message changes in the process of translation that are attributable to
the following only: a) stylistic changes, The data analyses have shown that stylistic
changes are within the realm of syntactical and grammatical aspects.
Key words: style, translation, shift, message and political news
Introduction
1. Methodology
2.Vinay and Darbelnet (1995).
four procedures: (a) transposition, (b) modulation, (c) equivalence, (d) adaptation which
are used whenever grammatical, lexical, structural or conceptional divergences are
required due to certain stylistic effects in the source text. Our main concern in this paper
is how shift or transposition effect the process of translation.
140
2.1. Transposition (Shift).
For Vinay and Darbelnet (1995:36) this involves replacing one word class with
another without changing the meaning of the message. They add that besides being a
special translational procedure, transposition can also be applied within a language. They
note that in translation there are two type of transposition: (a) obligatory transposition
and (b) optional transposition,
They also indicate that this method requires the translator to change the grammar
of the SL text; and the translator needs to shift the grammatical make-up of the SL to fit
that of the TL to achieve an equivalent effect or to produce the same effect on the
readership of the translation as was obtained on the readership of the original.
From a stylistic point of view, the base and the transposed expression do not
necessarily have the same value. Translators carry out a transposition if the translation
obtained fits better into the text or allows a particular nuance of style to be retained. The
transposed forms are generally more literary in character than the original. (Vinay and
Darbelnet, 1995:36).
3.Ghazala (1995).
Ghazala (1995:242) notes that style of short sentences has an important function
as it heightens the tempo of action in a text which is written in the form of a story apart
from the fact that such a style accelerates events and arouses suspense. He adds that it is
the only type of style which reflects a function of acceleration, that can be sensed by
reading the text aloud and quickly. Hence, in order to keep this function, it is suggested
that short sentences be re-echoed in the Arabic translation (Ghazala, 1995:242).
Ghazala further notes that the style of long sentences is better to be imitated in
Arabic because it has important stylistic functions which are a part of the meaning of the
141
text. He adds that translating an English long sentence into Arabic long sentences might
be less problematic than breaking it into short sentences (Ghazala, 1995:245).
Ghazala also notes that there is a common mistake of changing the passive into
the active made by some Arabic translators who claim that Arabic is an active language,
whilst English is passive (Ghazala, 1995:246). In any case, he adds that this aspect of the
(Ghazala, 1995:246).
In terms of redundancy and repetition, Ghazala (1995:252) considers redundancy

is a bad style in translation, since it could dispose the meaning of the translation. He adds
that such style as a long, boring way of expressing meaning, using two, three or more
words instead of one word only, but at the same time it is the translator‘s job to be
faithful to the original text as much as to his job of translation. With respect to repetition,
Ghazala (1995: 252) says that ―this style would rather be rendered into Arabic, thus
reflecting the same effect of the original, and avoiding the problem of artificial variation
which might be hard to accept‖.
4. Data Analysis
The data of this investigation comprises 9 political news articles from the BBC
(British Broadcasting News) and their corresponding Arabic translations. The BBC news
have been chosen because they are documents for public consumption in which the
readers are not specialized group of people; instead they are laymen. These newspaper
articles are not of general nature; instead they are news on political events and
happenings. All these articles have been taken from the Internet, since parallel versions
in Arabic can be accessed easily.
142
1. Passive Sentences.
In this section we will consider two cases of the English ST that need to be
rephrased to their suitable equivalence in the TT. We consider (1) through (3) below:
(1) (a) ST: US warns Russia over aid to Iran
Enriched uranium can be used as fuel in a nuclear activity, or, when highly refined, in a
nuclear weapon.
(b) TT: ‫ب‬٠ٚٛٔ ْ‫غا‬٠‫لف ِـبػضح ا‬ٛ‫ ث‬ٛ‫ؿى‬ٌّٛ ‫خ‬١‫ى‬٠‫ِطبٌجخ اِغ‬
( c) Trs: mutalaba amrikiya li mosko biwaqf musa‟adat eran nuwawiyan

Wa yumkin ann yustaikhdam al-yuranium al-mukhasab fi mafa‟lat tawlid al-taqa, aw fi
sun‟a al-asliha al-nuwawiya wa en kana hatha al-akhir yahtaj ela daraja „aliya min al-
takhsib.
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the ST contains the passive form can be
used whose structure is [ I‘-[Mod-Aux]- [V‘]]. Consequently, the Arabic version is
translated as [-Conj‘ [I‘ [Modal [Comp-[V‘]]]]]. The style of the passive sentence is to
concentrate on the action/patient while suppressing or ignoring the agent of the action.
The translator has reflected similar function, when he concentrates only on the action of
sentence during the translation. Thus, The passive form of can be used is translated as a
present simple along with a complementizer ْ‫( ا‬anna) ‗that‘. In line with Ghazala (1995),
the passive of the above translation is dominant and hence the stylistic effects are not the
same as those of the active.
In the next example, we consider English ST, was kidnapped several weeks ago in (2a)
and its Arabic translation in (2b) below:
(2) (a) ST: US soldiers in Baghdad fighting

head.
(b) TT: ‫ ثغضاص‬ٚ ٞ‫ اٌغِبص‬ٟ‫ف ف‬١ٕ‫لزبي ػ‬
.ٗ‫ عئـ‬ٍٝ‫ جثزٗ ثؼض اغالق اٌغصبم ػ‬ٍٝ‫غ ثُ ػثغ ػ‬١‫ لض اسزطف لجً ػضح اؿبث‬-‫ عجً اػّبي‬ٛ٘ ٚ -‫ وبْ غٗ اٌّطٍك‬ٚ
(c ) Trs: qital ‗nif fi al-rumadi wa Baghdad
Wa kana taha al-mtlaq- wa huwa rajul a‟mal –qad aukhtutifa qabla „dat asabee‟ thum „uthira „la
guthatihi b‟ada itlaq al-risas „ala rasih.
143
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the ST is a complex sentence. It has an
appositive relative clause as its subject. The main clause is in the the passive form with
the verb was kidnapped followed by an adjunct, (several weeks ago). The overall structure
is [ Subject (Relative clause) –Predicate (Passive-adjunct)]. Consequently, the Arabic
version is translated as [Conj‘-[IP‘ (+past)-N‘ (IP‘)] –Conj [V‘-adjunct]]. The style of
passive is to concentrate on the action and supress the agent of the action. The translator
has reflected similar functions in Arabic in his translation. From the above analysis, it is
noticed that the SL text a simple sentence, the main clause contains the active form gave
… the structured [V‘]. Consequently, the Arabic version is translated as [Conj‘-passive
V‘]. The style of active is changed into passive form ‫غ‬١‫( وّب اسز‬Kama ukhteera) , literally:
as chosen‘ in the Arabic version. The translator has reflected similar idea of election, but
in different grammatical style, since the translator has ignored the agent of the action in
the Arabic version.
3. Long Sentences.
For long sentences we will show only the structure of the complex sentences in
terms how they are connected to each other without detailing the internal structures. We
consider (3):
(3) (a) ST: Bolton appointed US envoy to UN
Confirmation hearings hit headlines during the spring but became mired in debate
as the Senate readied itself to consider the nomination of John Reborts to the US
Supreme Court.
(b) TT:
ٟ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ غبم ف‬ٚ ,‫غ‬١‫ٓ االسجبع سالي اٌغث‬٠ٚ‫خ لض رصضعد ػٕب‬١‫ض اٌزغك‬١‫ وبٔذ اٌجٍـبد اٌشبصخ ثزبو‬ٚ
‫ثغرؾ ٌٍّذىّخ‬ٚ‫ْ ع‬ٛ‫خ ج‬١‫ رغك‬ٟ‫زب٘ت ٌٍٕظغ ف‬٠ ‫ر‬ٛ١‫ اسظ ِجبؽ اٌل‬ٞ‫لذ اٌظ‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ؿبدخ ِٓ اٌجضي ف‬
.‫ب‬١ٍ‫خ اٌؼ‬١‫ى‬٠‫االِغ‬
(c ) Trs: tayjeen bultin mab‟uthan li-washintun lada al-umam al-
mutahida Wa kanat al-jalasat al-khasa bi takeed al-tarshih qad tasadarat
„anween al-akhbar khilal al-rabee‟ , wa lakin al-amr ghasa fi saha min al-
jadal fi al-waqt alathi akhatha majlis al-shiukh yataahab lil nadir fi tarshih
jun Roberts lil mahkama al-„lya .
144
From (3a‘-b‘) above, it is noticed that the ST is a conjoined sentence in which the
subordinate clause is a series of three verb phrase complements. The corresponding
Arabic translation is also a conjoined sentence, but the subordinate sentence is a relative
clasue. The ST and the TT are different in terms of the way the sentences are connected.
In Arabic the conjunction comes in a clasue initial posisition: ٚ (wa) ‗and‘, ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ‬ٚ (wa
laken al amr) ‗but the matter‘. In the ST, the conjunction but joins two clauses
somewhere in the middle of the long sentence. In Ghazala (1995) view, the long
sentence is a normal style that is often used in Arabic language.
4. Repetitions and Variation.
In this section we will consider two cases of repetitions. We consider the first
case in (4) :

Jacques Chirac. Mr. Chirac has described the withdrawal as courageous, and is expected to
urge more Israeli moves to keep momentum towards peace in the Middle East. Mr.Sharon,
for his part, is expected to use the visit to praise the French government for its action
against anti-Semitism in France
(b) TT: ‫غٌه‬١‫ؾ الجغاء ِذبصثبد ِغ ك‬٠‫ ثبع‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٚ‫كبع‬

.‫خ‬١ِ‫ب اِىبفذخ ِؼبصاح اٌـب‬ٙ‫ ارشظر‬ٟ‫اد اٌز‬ٛ‫خ ٌٍشط‬١‫ِخ اٌفغٔـ‬ٛ‫بعح الِزضاح اٌذى‬٠‫ْ اٌؼ‬ٚ‫ـزشضَ كبع‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ز‬٠ ٚ .‫ؿػ‬ٚ‫اال‬
(c )Trs: sharun fi barees li-ejra muhadathat m‘ shirak

Wa min al-mutawaq‟a ann tatim munaqashat al-insihab min qata‟ ghaza wa wasafa shirak
al-insihab bi anahu khutua shuja‟a wa min al-mutawaq‟a ann yahuth shirak al-esreliyeen
„la al-qiyam al-mazidmin al-khutuwat lil-muhafada „la al-daf‟ bi etejah al-salam fi al-
sharq al-awsat wa yatawaq‟ ann yastakhdim sharun al-ziyara li-emtidah al-hukuma al-
faransiya lil khutwat alati etakhathatha li mukafahat mu‟anat al-samiya.
In the English ST, the verb expected is repeated three times while the sense of
‗retreat‘ is expressed three times using three different lexical items: pullout, withdrawal
and move. Apparently, the repetition is a discourse strategy adopted by the writer of the
ST. A similar kind of repetition is found in the Arbic text as follows; for xample in the
determiner phrases and prepositional phrases: ‫لغ‬ٛ‫( اٌّز‬al-mitawaq‟a) ‗the expected‘,
145
‫( االٔـذبة‬al-ensihab) ‗the withdrawal‘, ‫اد‬ٛ‫( اٌشط‬al-khitiwat) ‗the steps‘ and ‫اد‬ٛ‫( ٌٍشط‬lil-
khuitwat) ‗for steps‘.
In the English ST, the noun phrase the nominal compounds tribal chielfs are
repeated twice; so is the pronominal they. A similar repetetive strategy is observed in the
Arabic TT: ‫خ‬١ٕ‫( ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ اٌـ‬zu‟amaa al-„ashaer al-suneeya) ‗Sunni tribal chiefs‘ and
'' ‫( ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ‬zu‟amaa al-„ashaer) ‗tribal chiefs‘. In Ghazala‘s (1995) view, some of
these phrases which are used as discourse strategies are sometimes unnecessarily
repeated in the TT.
5. Punctuation Marks.
Ghazala (1995) notes that punctuation marks have important stylistic functions
and caution Arabic translators to pay attention to them as they may have some semantic
implications. In this section we will consider the punctuation marks written in two cases
of the English ST and the TT using data in (5):
(5) (a) ST Maliki endorsed as new Iraqi PM.

They also gave the post of Parliament speaker to Mahmood al Mashhadani , a sunni Arab
.…
(b) ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫ظ ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫ سئ‬ٟٕ‫ ع‬ٛ٘ٚ ٟٔ‫ذا‬ٙ‫د اٌّؾ‬ّٛ‫ش ِس‬١‫وّا اخر‬
(c ) Trs:Kama ukhteera mahmood al mashadani wa hua suni raees lil jam‟eyah al

wataneeyah.
(8) (69) (a) ST: Gaza settlers face tough decision
Leader Ismail Haniya saud: ― Hamas confirms it is committed to armed resistence,

it is our strategic choice until the end of the occupation of our land.‖
(b)ٍٟ١‫ً االٔغساب االعشائ‬١‫ غضج لث‬ٟ‫ ف‬ِٟٕ‫ذا٘ة ا‬

‫ح‬٠‫ا‬ٙٔ ٟ‫ زر‬ٟ‫د‬١‫اسٔا االعررشاذ‬١‫٘زا خ‬,‫ا تاٌمراي اٌّغٍر‬ِٙ‫ " زّاط ذؤوذ اٌرضا‬:‫ح‬١ٕ٘ ً١‫ زّاط اعّاػ‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٞ‫اد‬١‫ لا ي اٌم‬ٚ
."‫ٕا‬١‫ازرالي اساض‬
(c ) taahub amni fi gaza qubeil al-insihab al-israeli
Wa qala al-qeeyadi fi hamas esma‘eel haneeya: ― hamas tuakid eltizamaha bi

al-qital al-musalah, hatha khyarana al-estitratigi hata nihayat ehtilal aradeeina‖
146
In (5a) a comma has been used in the ST to mark a following clause without using
a syntactic connective. Without the comma in place, a relative pronoun who is necessary.
Its corresponding Arab text in (5b) ignores the comma. The ST contains a colon and two
inverted commas. Hence, it is observed that punctuation marks are used inconsistently in
the TT.
Conclusion
This paper has examined quite number of English BBC news texts. The structures of the
English texts and their corresponding Arab translations have been compared using a
comparative analysis techniques and some narrative descriptions. To facilitate
researcher‘s description, the researcher has chosen to work within the main Stylistic ‗s
heading such as fronting, punctuations, passive, repetition, variation ,short and long
sentences. In summary, in the process of translation, significantly there have been many
stylistic changes. Most of these changes are within the realm of syntax (sentences, clauses
and phrases). Some other stylistic changes are due to morphological functions (tenses and
verb morphology).
References
Ghazala, Hasan. (1995). Translation as Problems and Solutions: A Coursebook for

University Students and Trainee Translators. Beirut: Dar wa Maktabat Al-Hilal. Lebanon
Vinay, Jean-.Paul. and Darbelnet, Jean. (1995). Comparative Stylistic of French and
English :A Methodology for Translation. Amsterdam :John Benjamins, The Netherlands.
147
Translating English BBC News Texts into Arabic : A Stylistic Variation
Abstract
This paper focuses on the stylistic changes that occur when translating English political
news into Arabic. It attempts to find the answers to the research question (a) , “ What is
the nature of the stylistic changes that occur in the Arabic translation? Towards this end,
it will look at the provided data from the perspectives of the ideas of styles in Ghazala
(1995) such as fronting, complex-simple, long-short sentences, formal-informal, passive-
active, repetition-redundancy, and punctuation marks. It has been found that these
stylistic changes are within the realm of syntax (sentences, clauses and phrases) and
changes that are within the domain of morphology (tenses, verb morphology, modality
and articles). Still other changes are in the area of discourse strategies (direct/indirect
speech, metaphors, connectives and punctuation marks).
Key Words: syntax, style, message, and morphology
Introduction
The process of translation into Arabic reached a high level in the second century of the
Hijra (Islamic calendar), i.e., the ninth century A.D., under the rule of a caliph called Al-
Mamun (813-833H). (Al –Shabab,1996:67). He was considered the founder of Dar Al-
Hikma (The House of Wisdom). This translation school attracted scholars from all parts of
the Islamic world at that time. (Al –Shabab, 1996:67). Translation from foreign
languages into Arabic, however, had started earlier in the Arabic civilization, and on this
point, Al- Shabab (1996:67) mentions that:
…an important work known as ‗Kalila and Dumuna‘, which tells stories
narrated by animal characters, stories of Indian wisdom, was translated in
the first century of the Hijra Calendar (eighth century A.D), by Ibn- AL-
148
Muqafa, who was a prominent administrator of Persian origin in the
Umayyad dynasty.
Al- Shabab (1996:70) also pointed out that during the Middle Ages, contacts between the
Arab world and Western world were low, but at the turn of the eighteenth century,
contacts between the East and West increased with the Napoleonic expedition to Egypt
(1798-1801). Thus, Al- Shabab (1996:70) further mentions that:
…these contacts and other circumstances helped bring about general,

political and cultural awareness which came to be known as the Modern
Arab Renaissance. The return of Arab Egyptian scholars, who studied in
European missionaries in Lebanon and Palestine, created the background
for learning and teaching works of literature, philosophy and science.
Also according to Al-Shahab (1996:70) transnlation activities from the French and
English had not stopped since the early decades of the nineteenth century. He further
mentioned that the missionary movement in Lebanon and schools in Egypt introduced
French, English and the Humanities into Syria, Palestine and Egypt. He asserted that the
introduction of foreign languages resulted in the soul of translation into Arabic, which
remained active even today. (Al- Shaba, 1996:70).
Arabic, a Semitic language, has a structure which is dominantly Verb-Subject-Object

(VSO). Mouakket (1986). The form of the language as well as the culture and social
organization of its speakers, deviates strongly from the form and culture of Indo-
European languages. (Mouakket,1986). According to Al- Shabab (1996:72) these
central points of form and culture probably explain why most works in English-Arabic-
English translation approach the problem by consideration of important lexical features
and structural patterns, particularly those which pose translational ambiguity; as for
example, in the works of Arabic scholars such as Nijjar (1980), Al- Shabab (1996) and
Mouakket (1986). Nida‘s (1964) idea of ―dynamic equivalence‖ as the theoretical basis
for analysis was adopted.
Ghazala (1995).
149
sentences be re-echoed in the Arabic translation. (Ghazala, 1995:242). Ghazala further
notes that the style of long sentences is better to be imitated in Arabic because it has
important stylistic functions which are a part of the meaning of the text. He adds that
translating an English long sentence into Arabic long sentences might be less problematic
than breaking it into short sentences. (Ghazala, 1995:245).
English is passive. (Ghazala, 1995:246). In any case, he adds that this aspect of the
reflected in Arabic translations to reflect their important functions in the message.
(Ghazala, 1995:246).

original text as much as to his job of translation. With respect to repetition (Ghazala,
1995: 252) says that this style would rather be rendered into Arabic, thus reflecting the
be hard to accept.
Data Analysis
150
not specialized group of people; instead they are laymen. These newspaper articles are
not of general nature; instead they are news on political events and happenings. All these
articles have been taken from the Internet, since parallel versions in Arabic can be
accessed easily.
Passive Sentences.
In this section we will consider two cases of the English ST that need to be rephrased to
their suitable equivalence in the TT. We consider (1) through (3) below:
(1) (a) ST: US warns Russia over aid to Iran
Enriched uranium can be used as fuel in a nuclear activity, or, when highly refined, in a
nuclear weapon.
(b) TT: ‫ب‬٠ٚٛٔ ْ‫غا‬٠‫لف ِـبػضح ا‬ٛ‫ ث‬ٛ‫ؿى‬ٌّٛ ‫خ‬١‫ى‬٠‫ِطبٌجخ اِغ‬
( c) Trs: mutalaba amrikiya li mosko biwaqf musa‟adat eran nuwawiyan

Wa yumkin ann yustaikhdam al-yuranium al-mukhasab fi mafa‟lat tawlid al-taqa, aw fi
sun‟a al-asliha al-nuwawiya wa en kana hatha al-akhir yahtaj ela daraja „aliya min al-
takhsib.
The English ST in (1a) and its Arabic translation in (1b) have the structures in ( a‘) and
(b‘) respectively below:
(a‘) ST: Enriched uranium can be used as fuel in a nuclear activity…
[ [enriched uranium] [ [can [be ]]] [ used [as …..]]]]

IP‘ Spec I‘ Modal Aux V‘ Conj
(b‘) TT: ٟ‫َ اٌّشصت ف‬ٛ١ٔ‫عا‬ٛ١ٌ‫ـزشضَ ا‬٠ ْ‫ّىٓ ا‬٠ ٚ
Wa yumkin ann yustaikhdam al-yuranium al-mukhasab…
[ [wa [ [yumkin [ ann [ustakhdam [ al-yuranium ….]]]]]

Conj I‘ Modal Comp A‘ D‘
‗and + might + that + used + Uranium‘
151
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the ST contains the passive form can be used
whose structure is [ I‘-[Mod-Aux]- [V‘]]. Consequently, the Arabic version is translated
as [-Conj‘ [I‘ [Modal [Comp-[V‘]]]]]. The style of the passive sentence is to concentrate
on the action/patient while suppressing or ignoring the agent of the action. The translator
has reflected similar function, when he concentrates only on the action of sentence during
the translation. Thus, The passive form of can be used is translated as a present simple
along with a complementizer ْ‫( ا‬anna) ‗that‘. In line with Ghazala (1995), the passive of
the above translation is dominant and hence the stylistic effects are not the same as those
of the active.
In the next example, we consider English ST, was kidnapped several weeks ago in (2a)
and its Arabic translation in (2b) below:
(2) (a) ST: US soldiers in Baghdad fighting

head.
(b) TT: ‫ ثغضاص‬ٚ ٞ‫ اٌغِبص‬ٟ‫ف ف‬١ٕ‫لزبي ػ‬
.ٗ‫ عئـ‬ٍٝ‫ جثزٗ ثؼض اغالق اٌغصبم ػ‬ٍٝ‫غ ثُ ػثغ ػ‬١‫ لض اسزطف لجً ػضح اؿبث‬-‫ عجً اػّبي‬ٛ٘ ٚ -‫ وبْ غٗ اٌّطٍك‬ٚ
(c ) Trs: qital ‗nif fi al-rumadi wa Baghdad
Wa kana taha al-mtlaq- wa huwa rajul a‟mal –qad aukhtutifa qabla „dat asabee‟ thum „uthira „la
guthatihi b‟ada itlaq al-risas „ala rasih.
The English ST in (60a) and its Arabic translation in (60b) have the structures in ( a‘) and
(b‘) respectively below:
(a‘) ST: Taha al-Mutlaq, a businessman, was kidnapped several weeks ago….
[ [ [Taha al-Mutlaq [ [a businessman]]]] [ was [ kidnapped [ several weeks ago …]]]]

IP‘ Spec IP‘ IP D‘ I‘ V‘ Adjunct
(b‘) ‫غ‬١‫ لض اسزطف لجً ػضح اؿبث‬-‫ عجً اػّبي‬ٛ٘ ٚ -‫ وبْ غٗ اٌّطٍك‬ٚ
[ wa[ [kana [ [taha al-mtlaq wa huwa rajul]] [a‟mal [ qad [aukhtutifa „dat asabee‘ .]]]]]]
Conj IP‘ +past N‘ IP‘ Conj V Adjunct
‗and‘ ‗was‘ ‗Taha al-mutlaq - and he man might arrested several weeks…‘
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the ST is a complex sentence. It has an
appositive relative clause as its subject. The main clause is in the the passive form with
152
the verb was kidnapped followed by an adjunct, (several weeks ago). The overall structure
is [ Subject (Relative clause) –Predicate (Passive-adjunct)]. Consequently, the Arabic
version is translated as [Conj‘-[IP‘ (+past)-N‘ (IP‘)] –Conj [V‘-adjunct]]. The style of
passive is to concentrate on the action and supress the agent of the action. The translator
has reflected similar functions in Arabic in his translation.
Now, we will consider an example of active voice of the English ST in (61a) and its
Arabic version (3b) with transliteration in (3c ) below:
(3) (a) ST: Maliki endorsed as new Iraqi PM.

They also gave the post of Parliament speaker to Mahmood al Mashhadani , a sunni
Arab …
(b) TT:‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫ظ ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫ سئ‬ٟٕ‫ ع‬ٛ٘ٚ ٟٔ‫ذا‬ٙ‫د اٌّؾ‬ّٛ‫ش ِس‬١‫وّا اخر‬
(c) Trs. Kama ukhteera mahmood al mashadani wa hua suni raees lil jam‟eyah
alwataneeyah.
The English ST in (3a) and its Arabic translation in (3b) have the structures in ( a‘) and (b‘)
respectively below:
(a) They also gave the post of…..
[ … [ also [gave]the post of….]

IP Adv V D N P
(b) ‫خ‬١ٕ‫غ‬ٌٛ‫خ ا‬١‫ؾ ٌٍجّؼ‬١‫ عئ‬ٟٕ‫ ؿ‬ٛ٘ٚ ٟٔ‫ضا‬ٙ‫ص اٌّل‬ّٛ‫غ ِذ‬١‫وّب اسز‬
[Kama[ ukhteera [ mahmood al mashadani….]
COnJ V N
As chosen Mahmood al-mashadani….
(passive)
From the above analysis, it is noticed that the SL text a simple sentence, the main clause
contains the active form gave … the structured [V‘]. Consequently, the Arabic version is
translated as [Conj‘-passive V‘]. The style of active is changed into passive form ‫غ‬١‫وّب اسز‬
(Kama ukhteera) , literally: as chosen‘ in the Arabic version. The translator has reflected
similar idea of election, but in different grammatical style, since the translator has
ignored the agent of the action in the Arabic version.
Long Sentences.
153
For long senences we will show only the structure of the complex sentences in terms
how they are connected to each other without detailing the internal structures. We
consider (4):
(4) (a) ST: Bolton appointed US envoy to UN

Confirmation hearings hit headlines during the spring but became mired in debate
as the Senate readied itself to consider the nomination of John Reborts to the US
Supreme Court.
(b) TT:
ٟ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ غبم ف‬ٚ ,‫غ‬١‫ٓ االسجبع سالي اٌغث‬٠ٚ‫خ لض رصضعد ػٕب‬١‫ض اٌزغك‬١‫ وبٔذ اٌجٍـبد اٌشبصخ ثزبو‬ٚ
‫ثغرؾ ٌٍّذىّخ‬ٚ‫ْ ع‬ٛ‫خ ج‬١‫ رغك‬ٟ‫زب٘ت ٌٍٕظغ ف‬٠ ‫ر‬ٛ١‫ اسظ ِجبؽ اٌل‬ٞ‫لذ اٌظ‬ٌٛ‫ ا‬ٟ‫ؿبدخ ِٓ اٌجضي ف‬
.‫ب‬١ٍ‫خ اٌؼ‬١‫ى‬٠‫االِغ‬
(c ) Trs: tayjeen bultin mab‟uthan li-washintun lada al-umam al-
mutahida Wa kanat al-jalasat al-khasa bi takeed al-tarshih qad tasadarat
„anween al-akhbar khilal al-rabee‟ , wa lakin al-amr ghasa fi saha min al-
jadal fi al-waqt alathi akhatha majlis al-shiukh yataahab lil nadir fi tarshih
jun Roberts lil mahkama al-„lya .
Now, we will consider an example of a long sentence of the English ST in (a‘) and its
Arabic version in (b‘) below:
(a‘) [ [Confirmation hearings hit headlines during the spring]]

IP‘ IP
[but [ [became mired in debate [as [the Senate readied itself

Conj IP‘ Comp IP‘
[ [to consider the nomination of John Reborts to the US Supreme Court.]]]]]].

Comp‘ IP‘
154
(b‘) COMP‘
Comp IP‘
Conj.
wa
kanat al-jalasat al-kha a

bi takeed al-tarshih qad tasadarat
„anween al-akhbar khilal al-rabee‟ , CONJ‘
IP‘
Conj
wa lakin al-amr ghasa fi saha min al-jadal fi al-waqt D‘
IP‘
alathi akhatha majlis al-shiukh yataahab

lil nadir fi tarshih jun Roberts lil mahkama al-„lya
From (4a‘-b‘) above, it is noticed that the ST is a conjoined sentence in which the
subordinate clause is a series of three verb phrase complements. The corresponding
Arabic translation is also a conjoined sentence, but the subordinate sentence is a relative
clasue. The ST and the TT are different in terms of the way the sentences are connected.
In Arabic the conjunction comes in a clasue initial posisition: ٚ (wa) ‗and‘, ‫ ٌىٓ االِغ‬ٚ (wa
laken al amr) ‗but the matter‘. In the ST, the conjunction but joins two clauses
somewhere in the middle of the long sentence. In Ghazala (1995) view, the long
sentence is a normal style that is often used in Arabic language.
Repetitions and Variation.
In this section we will consider two cases of repetitions. We consider the first case in (5)
through (6):
155
Jacques Chirac. Mr. Chirac has described the withdrawal as courageous, and is expected to
urge more Israeli moves to keep momentum towards peace in the Middle East. Mr.Sharon,
for his part, is expected to use the visit to praise the French government for its action
against anti-Semitism in France
(b) TT: ‫غٌه‬١‫ؾ الجغاء ِذبصثبد ِغ ك‬٠‫ ثبع‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٚ‫كبع‬

.‫خ‬١ِ‫ب اِىبفذخ ِؼبصاح اٌـب‬ٙ‫ ارشظر‬ٟ‫اد اٌز‬ٛ‫خ ٌٍشط‬١‫ِخ اٌفغٔـ‬ٛ‫بعح الِزضاح اٌذى‬٠‫ْ اٌؼ‬ٚ‫ـزشضَ كبع‬٠ ْ‫لغ ا‬ٛ‫ز‬٠ ٚ .‫ؿػ‬ٚ‫اال‬
(c )Trs: sharun fi barees li-ejra muhadathat m‘ shirak

Wa min al-mutawaq‟a ann tatim munaqashat al-insihab min qata‟ ghaza wa wasafa shirak
al-insihab bi anahu khutua shuja‟a wa min al-mutawaq‟a ann yahuth shirak al-esreliyeen
„la al-qiyam al-mazidmin al-khutuwat lil-muhafada „la al-daf‟ bi etejah al-salam fi al-
sharq al-awsat wa yatawaq‟ ann yastakhdim sharun al-ziyara li-emtidah al-hukuma al-
faransiya lil khutwat alati etakhathatha li mukafahat mu‟anat al-samiya.
In the English ST, the verb expected is repeated three times while the sense of ‗retreat‘ is
expressed three times using three different lexical items: pullout, withdrawal and move.
Apparently, the repetition is a discourse strategy adopted by the writer of the ST. A
similar kind of repetition is found in the Arbic text as follows; for xample in the
determiner phrases and prepositional phrases: ‫لغ‬ٛ‫( اٌّز‬al-mitawaq‟a) ‗the expected‘,
‫( االٔـذبة‬al-ensihab) ‗the withdrawal‘, ‫اد‬ٛ‫( اٌشط‬al-khitiwat) ‗the steps‘ and ‫اد‬ٛ‫( ٌٍشط‬lil-
khuitwat) ‗for steps‘.
Now we will consider the next example (6) and its Arabic version with transliteration
below:
(6) (a) ST: Iraq tribes ‗taking on al-Qaeda‘
A group of Sunni tribal chiefs in Iraq say they have caught more than 100 al-Qaeda
members in recent months. The tribal chiefs in the Iraqi province of Anbar joined forces in
September in an attempt to defeat al-Qaeda. They set the salvation Council for Anbar and
claim to have reduced the numbers of weapons and foreign fighters coming into the area..
(b) "‫ ٌٍمبػضح‬ٜ‫خ "رزصض‬١‫خ ػغال‬١ٕ‫ػلبئغ ؿ‬
‫غ‬ٙ‫ االك‬ٟ‫ِٓ ػعبء اٌمبػضح ف‬1000 ِٓ ‫ اوثغ‬ٍٝ‫ا اٌمجط ػ‬ٛ‫ُ اٌم‬ٙٔ‫ اٌؼغاق ا‬ٟ‫خ ف‬١ٕ‫ػخ ِٓ ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ اٌـ‬ّٛ‫لبٌذ ِج‬
ٍٝ‫ٌخ ٌٍمعبء ػ‬ٚ‫ ِذب‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٟ‫ي اٌّبظ‬ٍٛ٠‫ا‬/‫ ؿجزّجغ‬ٟ‫ُ ف‬ٙ‫ار‬ٛ‫ا ل‬ّٛ‫ ِذبفظخ االٔجبع لض ظ‬ٟ‫ وبْ ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ ف‬ٚ.‫غح‬١‫االس‬
ٓ١١ٍ‫ اٌّمبر‬ٚ ‫ سفط ػضص االؿٍذخ‬ٟ‫ب ؿبّ٘ذ ف‬ٙٔ‫ ػػّذ ا‬ٚ‫اؿـذ ٘ظٖ اٌؼلبئغ ِجٍؾ أمبط االٔجبع‬ٚ.‫ُ اٌمبػضح‬١‫رٕظ‬
. ‫ ٘ظٖ إٌّطمخ‬ٟ‫االجبٔت ف‬
(c ) Trs: ‗ashaer suneeya eraqiya “tatasada lil-qa‟ada”
156
Qalat majmu‟a min zu‟amaa al-„ashaer al-suneeya fi al-eraq anahum alqaw al-qabd‟la
akthar min 1000 min a‟daa al-qa‟eda fi al-ashhur al-akhira. wa kana zu‟ama al-„ashaer fi
muhafadat al-anbar qad damu quwatahum fi septambar / aylul al-mdi fi muhawalat lil-
qada „la tandem al-qa‟eda wa asasat hathihi al-„ashaer majlis enqath al-anbar wa za‟amat
enaha sahamat fi khefd „adad al-aslha wa al-muqatileen al-ajaneb fi hathih al- mantaqa.
In the English ST, the noun phrase the nominal compounds tribal chielfs are repeated
twice; so is the pronominal they. A similar repetetive strategy is observed in the Arabic
TT: ‫خ‬١ٕ‫( ػػّبء اٌؼلبئغ اٌـ‬zu‟amaa al-„ashaer al-suneeya) ‗Sunni tribal chiefs‘ and ‫ػػّبء‬
'' ‫( اٌؼلبئغ‬zu‟amaa al-„ashaer) ‗tribal chiefs‘. In Ghazala‘s (1995) view, some of these
phrases which are used as discourse strategies are sometimes unnecessarily repeated in
the TT.
Punctuation Marks.
Ghazala (1995) notes that punctuation marks have important stylistic functions and
caution Arabic translators to pay attention to them as they may have some semantic
implications. In this section we will consider the punctuation marks written in two cases
of the English ST and the TT using data in (7) and (8):
(7) (a) ST Maliki endorsed as new Iraqi PM.

They also gave the post of Parliament speaker to Mahmood al Mashhadani , a sunni Arab
.…
(b) ‫ح‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫ظ ٌٍدّؼ‬١‫ سئ‬ٟٕ‫ ع‬ٛ٘ٚ ٟٔ‫ذا‬ٙ‫د اٌّؾ‬ّٛ‫ش ِس‬١‫وّا اخر‬
(c ) Trs:Kama ukhteera mahmood al mashadani wa hua suni raees lil jam‟eyah al

wataneeyah.
(68) (69) (a) ST: Gaza settlers face tough decision
Leader Ismail Haniya saud: ― Hamas confirms it is committed to armed resistence,

it is our strategic choice until the end of the occupation of our land.‖
(b)ٍٟ١‫ً االٔغساب االعشائ‬١‫ غضج لث‬ٟ‫ ف‬ِٟٕ‫ذا٘ة ا‬

‫ح‬٠‫ا‬ٙٔ ٟ‫ زر‬ٟ‫د‬١‫اسٔا االعررشاذ‬١‫٘زا خ‬,‫ا تاٌمراي اٌّغٍر‬ِٙ‫ " زّاط ذؤوذ اٌرضا‬:‫ح‬١ٕ٘ ً١‫ زّاط اعّاػ‬ٟ‫ ف‬ٞ‫اد‬١‫ لا ي اٌم‬ٚ
."‫ٕا‬١‫ازرالي اساض‬
(c ) taahub amni fi gaza qubeil al-insihab al-israeli
Wa qala al-qeeyadi fi hamas esma‘eel haneeya: ― hamas tuakid eltizamaha bi

al-qital al-musalah, hatha khyarana al-estitratigi hata nihayat ehtilal aradeeina‖
157
In (7a) a comma has been used in the ST to mark a following clause without using a
syntactic connective. Without the comma in place, a relative pronoun who is necessary.
Its corresponding Arab text in (7b) ignores the comma. As for (8a), the ST contains a
colon and two inverted commas. As found in the data in (8b), the translator has respected
the ST punctuation marks in his translation into Arabic. Hence, it is observed that
punctuation marks are used inconsistently in the TT.
Conclusion
This paper has examined quite number of English BBC news texts. The structures of the
English texts and their corresponding Arab translations have been compared using various
techniques: phrase markers in tree configuration, in linear structures (label-braketting)
and some narrative descriptions. To facilitate researcher‘s description, the researcher has
chosen to work within the main Stylistic ‗s heading such as fronting, punctuations,
passive, repetition, variation ,short and long sentences. In summary, in the process of
translation, significantly there have been many stylistic changes. Most of these changes
are within the realm of syntax (sentences, clauses and phrases). Some other stylistic
changes are due to morphological functions (tenses and verb morphology).
References
Al-Shahab, O.S. (1996). Interpretation and the Language of Translation: Creativity and
Conventions in Translation. London: Janes Publishing Company, U.K.
Mouakket, A. (1986). Linguistic and Translation: Some Semantic Problems in Arabic-
English Translation. Ph.D thesis, Georgetown University, U.S.A.
Najjar, M. F. (1984). Translation as a Corrective of Meaning: Cultural and Linguistics

Transfer between Arabic and English. Michigan: Ann Arbor University Press.
Nida, E.A. (1964). Toward a Science of Translating. Leiden: Brill, E.J., Netherlands.
158
The Strategies of Translating English Compounds into Arabic
Abstract
This paper is both a linguistic study of and a search for a methodology for the translation
of English nominal compounds into Arabic. The reasons for selecting such phenomena
for investigation are linguistic and pedagogic. Arabic having no such complexly-
packaged constructions, it will be argued, Arabic-speaking learners find it difficult to
cope with these in English owing to their semantic compactness, which might occasion
all sorts of mistranslation (sometimes funny but sad). This semantic opaqueness is
strongly believed to influence students' processing and translating negatively. The main
contribution of this paper consists in (i) suggesting a two-step strategy for students to
produce intelligible translations of these nominal sequences, namely, intralingual
disambiguation (using valence theory), and an interlingual search for translation
equivalence arrived at after all the pieces of the syntactic puzzle are put in the right place;
(ii) offering a set of generalizations or guidelines towards the building of a methodology
for compounds translation based on observations in translation practice and comparative
stylistics tutorials.
Introduction
This research focuses on the problems of English-Arabic translation and the importance
of understanding some methods for translating English nominal compounds into Arabic
language, morphological, syntactical, semantical peculiarities and diferences between
language in the process of translating. The underlying assumption for this research is that
the translator must understand the grammatical structure of English and Arabic to
translate English nominal compounds into Arabic language effectively since translation
is generally viewed as the process of establishing equivalence between the source
language and target language and equivalence depends mainly on the closeness or
159
remoteness of the source language to the target language .In translating, it is important to
ensure the surface meaning of the two languages in translation are approximately similar
and, at the same time, to ensure that the structure of the source language is preserved as
well as possible but not so closely that the target language structure will be seriously
distorted.
A survey of the related literature
2.1 Definition of English compounds
Compound constructions are so widely used and common in everyday speech. In addition
to this, they are common in all types of written text. According to Selkirk:
― compounds in English are a type of word structure made of two

constituents, each belonging to one of the categories noun,
adjective, verb, or preposition.‖
Selkirk (1982:13)
2.1.1 Compounding in English
The linguistic literature about compounding with English morphology is too wide to be
mentioned in detail in such limited space. Therefore, only features that are thought to be
relevant to the topic at hand are highlighted. As for Arabic compounding (al-murakabaat
il-;ismiyya ), a brief survey of compounding in Arabic will be given. Quirk et al cited in
Maalej (1994) ―adopt a lexcio- semantic approach which links compounds to sentential or
clausal paraphrases‖. This claim is supported by the evidence that compounds share
syntactic structures relation with sentences ( Selkirk 1982) in using the same lexical
categories of nouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs. Further, the head and modifier of
compounds are involved in complex grammatical functions ( thematic and non-thematic)
of subject, verb, object, complement, and adverbial like in clauses and sentences.
2.1.2 Background to English compounds
160
The majority of English compound types are headed – especially, right –headed and the
heads of these compounds display the syntactic and semantic characteristics that are
expected of heads. These compounds refer to classes of things and they that have used
daily.
Compounds play a role in the lexicon because they have the ability for creating a class of
noun phrase (NPs) intended for naming entities with no pre-existing names, and
according to Downing (1977:823) are characterized by ―packing a maximum amount of
information into a minimal amount of linguistic structure‖. Finin (1980:310) cited in
Maalej (1994) claims that one of the characteristic features of compounds in English is
their semantic compactness, i.e. the covert nature of the relations linking the head (the
one which is modified and often occupies the right most position in the nominal
sequence) and the non-head (the modifier).
Compounding widen the range of combinational possibilities for the suffixes which
create new meaning. The following combinations of lexemes may exemplify such
productivity: bathroom towel rack, designer training program (Selkirk, 1982:5). It is
found that major issues to be studied in compounding are the generation, interpretation,
and headedness of compound. In addition to this, a division between the transformational
and the nontransformational views will be made. Maalej (1994) suggests about the
difference between them is that:
―The former holds that compounds arise from a deep

structure similar to that of a relative clause .In surface
structure, unnecessary material is deleted to make a
compound construction possible‖
Maalej (1994)
This model has been contested as: -

(i) The semantic relation between the head and non-head
can vary considerably.
(ii) In compounds, some of semantic relation which makes it
impossible for the meaning of the compounds to be captured
through modification in the strict sense by relative clause
161
paraphrase. This semantic relation may include part whole,
whole-part, comparison, time, place, etc.
Selkirk (1982:30)
In the example by Downing (1977:828) about ― suicide attempt‘‘ Downing says that ―it
is not an attempt which is suicide‖ .This means that compounds present a deep strucutre.
While according to Selkirk (1982:15 –19), ―the grammar of compounding in English
consists simply of a set of context-free rewriting rules‖ Selkirk says ―transformation has
no role in English compounding‘‘.The idea of headedness is considered among the major
issues in compounding because from our understanding of the headedness, we can
differentiate the relation between the head and the modifier whether English compounds
or Arabic compounds because both of them have a head and a non head. Also, because
the semantic interpretation of the overall compound structure depends on the manner,
Selkirk points out:
―the non head constituent of the compound in some way

further defines the head‖. She suggests that ―the semantic
relation between cake and baker is the same as the relation
between cakes and baker in the phrasal collocation a baker of
cakes: cakes is the theme of baker‘‘.
Selkirk (1982:23)
At the surface structure, there is a lexico-semantic approach which links compounds to

sentential or clausal paraphrases. This means that compounds share syntactic structure
relation with sentences in using the same lexical categories of nouns, verbs, adjectives,
and adverbs .The head and modifier of compounds are involved in complex grammatical
function of subject, verb, object, complement, and adverbial like in clauses and
sentences.
2.1.3 The categories of English compounds
Selkirk (1982:14) and Maalej (1994) divided English compounds into three kinds
namely, compound of nouns, compound of adjectives, and compound of verbs.
162
Compound of nouns can be divided into two word compounds and multi-word
compounds. Both two-word compounds and multi word compounds have their own sub
divisions. Two-word compound is sub-divided according to adjectivability, non-
deverbativity and deverbativity. Deverbativity itself is divided into deverbal –er, deverbal
noun in (–ing, -ment,-tion), deverbal noun countable and deverbal noun deriving from
prepositional verb. Multi word compound, on the other hand is sub-divided into active
compound and passive compound. The figure below shows this division:
Word-formation
English compounds
Compounds of noun. Compounds. Of adjectives Compounds. Of verbs
Two- word compound multi-word compound
Comound of. (non)devebativity Compound of. deverbativity Active Compound Passive

Compound.
Deverbal –er deverbal noun in –ing,-ment,-ion deverbal noun countable
Deverbal noun deriving from prepositional verb
Figure 2.1 Categories of English compounds and the stem of English nominal
compounds. (Extracted from Selkirk 1982:14 & Maalej 1994)
163
2.1.3.1 Compounds of nouns
This kind of compound is considered the largest one because is divided into four main
categories with subdivisions.These categories are N.N, A.A, V.N and P.N. According to
Selkirk (1982:14) a compound noun could have a suntax like N.N (livingroom), A.N
(wellwisher), P.n (outbuilding and V.N (rattlesnake).
N.N is divided into two word and multi word. Two word is divided into non-
deverbativity (nominal verbles compound), deverbal with –er (nominal verbal
compound), deverbal with (-ing,-ment.-ion), deverbal with countable and the last one is
deverbal with deriving preposition.The difference between non-deverbal (nominal
verbles compound) and deverbal with –er(nominal verbale compound) is that the verbale
element of non-devebativity (nominal verbless compound is) is missing Dillon (1977:51),
which means the headnoun of non deverbativity does not take suffix like –er,-ing,-ment
and –tion, but this kind of compound consists of two sequences noun.noun and the
interpretation of the noun compounds depends on the relation that is understood between
them.Maalej (1994) states about non-deverbativity (nominal verbless compound) is that
nominal verbless compounds do not include verbs but consist of an NN sequence, and are
described more semantically, because of the relation between the HN with the modifier.
For example:
― in steam engine, N1 operates/ powers N2, whereas in telephone
receiver N1 has N2. Semantic typologies, however, capitalize on
the modification of one concept by another. Talking about GM
cars, which should be read as cars made by GM,‖
Maalej (1994)
Another kind of compounds of noun is the nominal verbal compound with suffixes to the
headnoun (deverbal). The headnoun of nominal verbal compounds is formed by adding
the suffixes –er, -tion, -ment, -ing to base verb to make deverbal noun. Dillon (1977)
described this kind of compound:
164
―The sense of the compound can be at least roughly
paraphrased as a sentence in which the verb is the one
underlying the second (deverbal noun ) and the first plays
some role in relation to it. As a construction type- noun +
deverbal noun –it is indeterminate with respect to the exact
role played by the first noun, but the learner is not at at an
utter loss in guessing the range of alternatives‖
Dillon (1977:51)
The figure below shows compound of nouns and its kinds:
Non-deverbativity
deverbal with -er
Tow-word deverbal with-
-ment, -tion,-ing
deverbativity
deverbal with
countable
N.N Deverbal deriving

A.N from preposition
Active compound
V.N
NC
P.N multi word
Passive compound
Figure 2.2 Categories of compound of nouns
2.1.3.2 Compounds of adjective

Compound adjectives are formed according to a large number of different patterns. They
consist of three categories noun, adjective, and preposition. According to Selkirk
165
(1982:14), ‗a compound adjective may consist of a noun, an adjective, or a preposition
followed by an adjective‘. As in the following example which are quoted from Selkirk:
― NA (headstrong), AA (icy cold), PA (overwide)‖

Selkirk (1982:15)
The figure below shows the kind of compound of adjective according to Selkirk‘s theory
A A A
Figure 2.3 Kinds of compound of adjectives
2.1.3.3 Compounds of verbs
In relation to this kind of English compounds; Bauer (1983:207) cited Adams as saying:
― The majority of compound verbs in English are not

formed by putting two lexemes together to form a new
verb, but by back-formation or conversion from
compound noun‖
According to Selkirk (1982:14), ― a compound of verb may consist of a preposition followed

by a verb‖ as in the following example which is quoted from Selkirk (1982:15), ‗outlive‘.
So, this kind of English compound is different from compounds of noun and compounds of
adjective because it consists of two word namely a preposition and a verb to produce one
166
construction of compound which is compound of verb. The following figure shows the kinds
of compounds of verbs:
V P V
Figure 2.4 Kinds of compounds of verbs
2.2 Arabic compounds
According to Kharm and Hajjaj (1989:47), ―Arabic compounds are made up of two
constituents‖, but Arabic compounds take different syntactic shapes when translated. In
other words, the meaning may remain the same when translated into English; but the
syntax is different. This happens because some Arabic compounds when translated will
include three factors namely annexation al-iDafa, which means that the first noun al-
mudaf ilahi (head) has neither article nor nunation and the second noun al-mudaf
(modifier) puts in the genetive case Versteech (1997:78), e.g baytu l-maliki(the owner ‗
house ), and baytu l-raguli (the man house ) preposition, and declension(accusative,
nominative, genetive).
In Arabic language there is just one form of noun compound which is noun+ noun while
in English language there are three forms that can take one form when they are translated
into Arabic. Two of them deal with the possessive case such as noun+‘s+noun,
noun+of+noun and the last one is compound of noun+noun.
2.2.1 Categories of Arabic nominal compounds
Owing to the differences between Arabic compounding (AC) and English compounding
(EC), Kharma and Hajjaj (1989:47) claim that ―the mistakes that students commit, are
167
expected to be of the type where the semantic relation between the elements is made
syntactically explicit in Arabic‘‘. Arabic compounds are simple and less productive than
English compounds (?al-murakkabaat l-?ismiyya) because English compounds are so
wide and consist of a lot of forms depending on each type such as Compounds of nouns,
Compounds of verbs and Compounds of adjectives. Arabic compounds include three
types:
(i)Numeral compounds (?al-murakkabaat l-?adadiyya ) which are lexicals as in
xamsata ashara (literally means: five ten for fifteen)
(ii) Blended compounds (?al-murakkabaat l-mazjiyya) which are lexico-semantics as
in SabaaHa masaa (literally means: morning evening for day and night).However,
both blended compounds and Numeral compounds contain an implicit additive
article wa (and) from the surface to avoid ambiguity.
(iii) Other types of Arabic compound patterns that are equivalent to most English
compound patterns are nominal annexation (al-iDafa), which includes annexation,
pluralization and adjective (described and describer).
So, English compounds may be problematic in translation since, Arabic uses very little
linguistic resource to cope with English compounds, namely: nominal annexation (or al-
iDaf), which refers to a form of genetive where the second noun (modifier) is annexed to
the first, making it definite. Translating compounds into Arabic is essentially
investigating the valence of compounds constituents, which involves:-
(i) the relation between head and modifier.
(ii) Morpho-syntactic information in order for compound construction to be linked
within Arabic discourse.
The typology offered here is simple in order to cope with Arabic compounds because the
range of English compounds is so wide compared to the range of Arabic compounds. For
practical purposes, compounds will be classified into one standard form, which is an
annexation compound to be in parallel to English nominal compounds and suit their
translation into Arabic. Nevertheless, sometimes there is a type of Arabic nominal
compound in which its modifier does not take a genetive case or annexation but it is still
considered a nominal compound such as ‫ﺭﻠﺍ ﺔﻠﺎﺳ‬ ‫( ﺓﺀﺍﺭﻗ‬reading a letter). We found that
168
the modifier of the Arabic compound ‫ﺭﻠﺍ ﺔﻠﺎﺳ‬ does not take the genetive case but the
compound is considered as a nominal compound.
Qabash (1974:282), defines Arabic nouns as consisting of simple nouns and compound
nouns. Simple nouns consist of one word noun while compound nouns are nouns, which
consist of two words built together. The compound itself consists of three types; namely
Blended compound and numeral compound and annexation compound. The figure below
shows the division of Arabic compounds
Arabic noun
simple compound
Annexation compound Blended compound numerical compound
Figure 2.5 Types of Arabic nominal compounds
Examples:
Simple: ‫‗ ﺩﻣﺤﺃ‬Ahmad‘
Annexation compound: ‫‗ ﺔﻳﻋﻮﻧ ﻸﻟﺃ ﺔﺤﻠﺴ‬weapons quality‘
Blended compound: ‫‗ ﺖﻭﻣﺍﺭﺿﺣ‬HaDramaut‘ Ahmad (1974:282)
Numerical compound: ‫‗ ﺭﺷﻋﺩﺣﺃ‬Ahada ashar‘ (literally means: one ten for eleven)
Qabash (1974:283)
169
2.2.2 The Structure of Arabic nominal compounds
Arabic compounds are different from English Compounds syntactically, English

compounds can be said to take one form in written text, while Arabic Compounds can
take more than one form when the English Compounds are translated.The idea of
building on Arabic Compound is mainly dependent on the explanation of the Case
ending of words in the sentence, called (‗irab) a term that originally meant the correct
use of Arabic, according to the language of the Bedouin which means (‗irab )
―declension‖ .
Westren grammarians usually call the three ending Nominative (raf ‗), genetive (jar ),
accusative (nasb) .The case endings refer to syntactic functions. A word may be followed
by an ending to indicate that the word is a definite nunation (tanuin ) . The main
function of the genetive case is to mark the effect of particles on nouns to indicate the
second in possessive construction. Particles which govern the nouns are called in Westren
tradition ‗preposition ‗ e.g. ila l-madinati (to the city ) .
In the possessive construction where Arabic compounds include Case endings, it is

annexation (al –iDafa) which means, the first noun (al-mudaf ) has neither article nor
nunation, and the second noun (al- muDaf ileihi) puts in the genetive case. Versteech
(1997), comments on the relation between the first noun and the second noun as below:
―The governance relationship between the two nouns in the (iDafa )

annexation construction is a controversial issue .Because in
principle nouns do not govern, later grammarians objected to
Sibawayhi ‗s view that the first noun govern the second. Instead
they attributed ending to a particle li (for ) belong to which was
inserted on an underlying level i.e baytu li-l-maliki (house for –
the-king ) genetive.‖
Versteech(1997:78)
170
3.1 Methodology and Analysis
3.1.1 Selection methods

In this paper, I‘m going to use one theory in translating English nominal compound into
Arabic language. The theory is Selkirk‗s model (1982). The idea of this theory is that,
English compounds made up of two constituents that belonging to one of the following
categories: noun (and its branches), verb, adjective, and preposition.
Non-deverbativity
.
deverbal with –er.
N.N deverbal with –ing,-ment, -ion.

A.N
NC V.N deverbal with countable
P.N
Deverbal with deriving preposition
Figure 3.1 Categories of Selkirk‘s Model
171
Article analysis
Selkirk‘s Model (1)
English text(SL) Arabic text(TL)
English nominal compounds
non-deverbativity.
deverbal with –er.
N.N deverbal with –ing,-ment, -ion.

A.N looking for them
V.N deverbal with countable
P.N in the Arabic article
deverbal with deriving preposition
Figure 3.2 Shows the analysis of English nominal

compounds according to Selkirk‟s theory in the English-
Arabic article
3. 1.2 Two-word compounds
Quite obviously, this class of compounds consists of modifier and head noun, which, for the sake of
brevity, will be referred to as N1 and N2, respectively. The criteria to be applied to this class is
adjectivilizability, (non)deverbativity, and countability.
172
3. 1. 2.1. Adjectivilizability
As the study is adopted by Maalej (1994), it is advisable to ask students to check whether the translation
equivalent of N1 in Arabic (henceforth, TL) is adjectivilizable. If it is so, the sequence could be
translated as N+Adj (na3t wa man3ut or describer and described) in TL. For instance, in:
(1) investment opportunities,
investment (?istiqmaar) has a corresponding adjective in TL (?istiqmaariyyun), which makes it
possible to translate the whole as imkaaniyyat ?istiqmaariyya .
There are cases, however, where, even though N1 is adjectivilizable, the compound may also
be translated as N+N, where N1 is annexed to N2 as in the following:
(2) forest products
(2') ?almantujaat l-Rabiyya
(2'') mantujaat l-Raba
But translating (2) as (2'') may create ambiguity as in:
(3) I prefer forest products, which have not been treated chemically.
(?ufaDDilu mantujaati l-Rabati l-latii lam taxDa3 li-3ilaajin kiimyamiyyin.)
The question is: which does the relative clause modify, l-Rabati or mantujaati l-Rabati? There is no
indication in the translation that one or the other is chosen as the antecedent for the relative clause.
However, translating the sequence as:
(4) (?ufaDDilu l-mantujaati l-Rabiyyati l-latii lam taxDa3 li-3ilaajin kiimya?iyyin),
173
definitely collapses l-mantujaati l-Rabiyyati in one indivisible semantic unit, thus doing away with
ambiguity.
Maalej (1994), noted that the adjectivilizability criterion should not be taken as an infallible one with.
Even though it accounts for a respectable rate of success, some counterexamples do exist. For instance,
gold digger, whose N1 is adjectivilizable (dahabiyyun for gold), does not yield an acceptable translation
with an adjective in TL:
(5) gold digger
(5') * al-munaqqib ?idahabiy (the digger the golden: the golden digger)
(5'') al-munaqqib 3an ?i-dahab (the digger for the gold: the gold digger)
Some other exceptions include: key word, liquid air, keynote address, etc. Instructors should guard
against overgeneralizations by presenting these as guidelines and not rigid rules, by talking their
students into measuring the results of applying these guidelines to overall Arabic acceptability.
3. 1. 2.2. Non-deverbativity
Deverbativity deals with nouns deriving from verbs through suffixes such as -ing, -ion, -er, and -ment.
Non-deverbativity, therefore, is used here to mean nouns that are not derived from verbs through
suffixes, but that may have the same linguistic form as verbs like funtion, catch, experience, etc., whose
class memebership is extended to nouns and verbs in English. If N1 of a given compound is not
adjectivilizable, and if N2 is not a deverbal noun, the sequence is translated as N+N, where N2 is always
indefinite and N1 is always definite and annexed to N2 as in the following:
(6) picture quality
(naw3iyyatu ?i-SSura: quality the picture)
This way of translating accounts for a big number of English compounds, where
3. 1. 3. Deverbativity
174
The deverbal component is crucial for the following reasons:
(i) the deverbal noun facilitates recognition within the structure of the compound;
(ii) being a deverbal noun, N2 follows most of the steps implemented in the translation of two-word
compounds, with a few modifications; and
(iii) Since the deverbal noun originates in a verb, the student would have to track its verbal counterpart
to see whether it is a self-transitive verb, a transitive verb passing through a preposition or simply an
intransitive one. Notice that within this class four major types can be isolated depending on the
deverbal noun.
3. 1. 3. 1. Deverbal noun in -er
If N1 is not adjectivilizable and abstract, and if N2 is a deverbal N in -er, the sequence is best translated
as N+N, where N2 is an agentive noun and N1 is annexed to it in the singular as in:
(7) lightning arrester
(daafi3 ?iS-Saa3iqa)
3. 1. 3. 2. Deverbal noun in -ing, -ion, -ment
If N1 is an abstract non-adjectivilizable noun, and if either N1 or N2 is a deverbal N in -ing, -ion, -

ment, the sequence is best translated as N+N, where the deverbal noun is rendered as a definite verbal
noun (or maSdar) annexed to the other N, Maalej (1994) . The following examples illustrate the
different suffixes in different positions, and verbal nouns will be underlined:
(8) recording function (waDiifat ?i-tasjiil)
(9) flight simulation (muHaakaat ?i-Tayaraan)
(9') absorption peak (dirwatu l-?imtiSaaS)
(10) management sciences (3ulum t-taSarruf)
175
(10')
Note that the -ing is restricted here because very often when they occupy N2 position, they
systematically take count/concrete N1, which we will go to later.
There are cases, however, where either the modifier or the HN can consist of a conjoined structure as in
the following examples:
(11a) transportation and cleaning (modifier) technologies
(11b) color reproduction and sharpness (HN)
In the case of (11a), students should be instructed to translate it as technologies of transportation and
cleaning, with transportation first following the HN technologies, as in:
(11a') taqniyaat n-naql wa t-tanDiif
As for (11b), color reproduction is translated as a self-sufficient compound followed by the translation
of sharpness, cliticizing a pronoun coreferential with the person and gender of the HN reproduction as
in:
(11b') muHaakat l-?alwaan wa Hiddatiha
3. 1. 3. 3. Deverbal noun countable
If N1 is a concrete countable non-adjectivilizable noun, and if N2 is a deverbal N in -er, -ing, -ion, -

ment, the sequence is best translated as N+N, where N2 is rendered as a verbal noun (or maSdar) and
N1 is systematically pluralized and annexed to N2. Note that if the sequence is indefinite in the SL, it
will be translated as N+N, where both are indefinite as in:
(12) a travel agency (wikaalat ?asfaar)
However, if the sequence is definite in the SL, it is rendered in the TL as NN, where only N1 is definite
as in:
176
(13) the car park (marfa? ?issayyaraat)
Exceptions to this rule may be found: e.g. road holding (mulaazamati t-Tariiq). One obvious reason in
Arabic for not pluralizing road, although it is a concrete countable non-adjectivilizable noun, may be
found in raising ambiguity. Translating road holding as mulaazamati t-Turuq, could be ambiguous
between two readings: t-Turuq, being methods in Arabic, the sequence in the plural can mean sticking to
methods instead of sticking to the road.
Concluding points for translating English nominal compounds into Arabic
This section sums up the major problems that are faced by the translator in translating English
nominal compounds into Arabic language to get nominal compounds. Firstly, Arabic language
does not have compounds of adj plus N and compounds of P plus N while V.N, found in Arabic
as a phrase not as a nominal compound because in Arabic language there is only one form of
nominal compound, which consists of noun plus noun while English language has all these kinds
of compounds. Secondly, the translator mostly the translator does not translate all of English
nominal compounds in the SL text, and at the same time he does not give any words or
expressions for the omitted English nominal compounds in the TL, in this way the translator uses
type of translation which translation by omission which causes a loss in the meaning of Arabic
text. Thirdly, it is not difficult to apply the transposition in Arabic nominal compound when
translating from the SL text, because sometimes the translator has to use it, because he/she finds
that literary translation not the suitable way to give equivalence between the SL and the TL.
Concerning the literary translation method or word for word translation method, the translator of
English nominal compounds into Arabic always uses literary translation because by using this
method, the translator thought it is sometimes suitable to convey the whole meaning of the
English nominal compounds into Arabic and at the same time can make the reader of the Arabic
text understand the idea clearly. If we come to the equivalence, in all article analyzed, the
translator his/her first aim is to find acceptable meaning between the SL and the TL.This means
that the translator succeeds in using the equivalence when translated English nominal
compounds into Arabic. Concerning borrowing, modulation, calque, the translator does not use
them or find them when translated English nominal compounds into Arabic Fourthly, sometimes
177
it is difficult to give alternative translations to the English nominal compounds when translating
into the TL text. So, it is problematic. Fifth, sometimes the modifier of Arabic nominal
compounds does not always take the annexation ‫( اي‬the) to make it definite but it takes the
preposition )ًٌ) (for) and this preposition called ―appended preposition‖ does not give new
meaning to the Arabic structure but just strengthen the meaning or purpose in the sentence of the
Arabic text. Sixth, the translators sometimes are forced to use prepositions to be appended to the
Arabic structure to convey the same or similar meaning in the SL, because if the translator does
not use the preposition with some of the Arabic nominal compounds that need a preposition the
meaning is affected and becomes funny. Seventh, all English structures of two words may be
considered as compounds in the SL text, but not all of these English nominal compounds when
translated into Arabic language will give nominal compounds because of the special preposition
such as ‗for‘ and ‗from‘ which link the head noun with the modifier in order to give strong
meaning in the Arabic text. Eight, syntactically, Arabic nominal compounds should take the
declension signs. The modifier always takes the genetive case (kasra) while the head noun
should take the accusative or nominative depending on its position in the TL text and also the
modifier should be definite while English nominal compound does not have such a declensional
system. Night, morphologically, sometimes the modifier of the English nominal compounds in
the SL text take an - S and it does not give a plural meaning to the English modifier in the SL
text as ‗the sanctions issues‘ . When this compound is translated into Arabic language, the
translator cannot keep its plural marker in the Arabic version because in Arabic language we do
not have the plural for this word‘ sanctions‘ because its singular gives two meanings; singular
and plural.
178
REFERENCES
Bauer, L. (1983). English word-formation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Bauer, L. (1988). Introducing linguistic morphology. Bristol. UK
Dillon, L.G. (1977). Introduction to contemporary linguistic semantic. New Jersey. USA.
Downing, A. & Locke, P. (1992). A university course in English grammar. Prentice Hall.
UK.
Downing, P. (1977). ―On the creation and use of English compound nouns‖, Language,
53: 4, pp.810-842.
Finaly, I.F. (1971). Translating. Edinburgh.UK

.
Kharm, N. & Hajjaj, A. (1989). Errors in English among Arabic grammar of the written
language. Harlow: Longman (13) group Ltd. UK.
Kharma, N. (1983). A contrastive analysis of the use of verb forms in English and
Arabic:studies in descriptive linguistics; vol. 10. Heidelberg, Germany.
.
Maalej, Z. (1994). ―English-Arabic machine translation of nominal compounds”. In
P.Bouillon & D. Estival (eds.), proceedings of the workshop on compound noun:
Multilingual Aspect of nominal composition. Geneva :ISSO, pp.135-146.
Qabash, A. (1974). Al kamal fi al nahw wal Sarf lillughati al arabia. Dar Al-Jeel
Company . Beirut. Lebanon.
Selkirk, E. O. (1982). The syntax of words. Cambridge/ Mass : The MTT Press.
Versteech, O. (1997). The Arabic language. Edinburgh.UK
Vinay, J.P. & Darbelnet, J. (1995). Comparative stylistic of French and English : a
methodology for translation. Amsterdam, the Netherlands & Philadelphia. USA.
179
180

Buchblock

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Buchblock

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SYNTACTIC CHANGES IN ENGLISH-ARABIC TRANSLATION: WITH

REFERENCE INTO BBC NEWS TEXTS

Key words: Syntax, Morphology, Style, Culture, and Discourse

Vinay and Darbelnet (1995).

According to Culicover (1997:134) X‘-Theory is a theory of phrase structure; that is a

Stylistic Changes to Past Continuous Tense.

(a‘) ST: Iraq‘s President Jalal Talabani has asked…

(b‘) TT: […[takleefih min taraf al raees jalal al talabani. …]

[ ... Jalal al-Talabani]

Stylistic Changes to the Past Simple Tense.

(2) (a) ST: „US warns Russia over aid to Iran‟

[… [ it ] [has [helped [ bolster [Iranian nucleaur know-how]]]

Stylistic Changes to Future Simple Tense.

(b) TT: ٟ‫ غؼح ٌّزبثؼخ االٔـذبة االؿغائ‬ٌٝ‫ٕمً ِمغٖ ا‬٠ ‫ػجبؽ‬

(a‘) ST: … he is moving his office…

[…. [ he ] [ is [ moving [ his office]]]]

(b‘) ٗ‫ٕمً ِىرث‬١‫أٗ ع‬

(4) (a) ST: Syria devices Hariri probe „bias‟

(b) TT: ٞ‫غ‬٠‫بي اٌذغ‬١‫ اغز‬ٟ‫ك ف‬١‫ٕزمض ٌجٕخ اٌزذم‬٠ ‫االؿض‬

and (b‘) respectively:

(a‘) ST: …he was studying projects…

(b‘) TT: ‫ذسط خطح‬٠ ٗٔ‫ا‬

Stylistic Changes in Prepositional Phrases.

( c) Trs : al maleki : aureed tashkeel hukuma tumathel atyaf al mujtam‟ al‟raqi

the way P‘ Adjunct

(b‘) ‫ح‬١‫ى‬٠‫اخ االِش‬ٛ‫عرٕغسة اٌم‬

Stylistic Changes in Adverbial Phrase.

(b) TT: ‫شان‬١‫ظ ال خشاء ِسادثاخ ِغ ؽ‬٠‫ تاس‬ٟ‫ْ ف‬ٚ‫ؽاس‬

( c) Trs: qabla „am wahaed faqat kana tasaruf Chirac….

between the ST and the TT:

(a‘) Only a year ago, Mr Chirac…

Spec. Mr. Chirac …..

Prt‘ Spec ADV

(b‘) ‫شان‬١‫ واْ ذصشف ؽ‬,‫ازذ فمظ‬ٚ َ‫لثً ػا‬

qabla am wahed faqat

Stylistic Changes in Noun Phrases.

(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬.

(c) Trs: Wa kanat jabhat al tawafeq al „raqeeyah wa heya abraz al jama‟at al

the noun phrases:

(a‘) ST: The main Sunni coalition….

Stylistic Changes in Verb Phrase and Complex Clauses.

(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬

(c ) Trs: T‟aqed al jam‟eyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeyah ( al barlaman) ejtema‟an al

(a‘) …meet on Saturday to vote on a new Prime Minister …

[…meet on Saturday [ [to vote [ on [a [new Prime Minister]]]…]]]

Stylistic Changes in Adjectival Phrases.

(9) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier

(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬

(c) Trs: (al-jam‘eeyah al-wataneeyah tandur fi tarshih al-j‘fari).

[ …….[ had [ raised [ sharp [opposition] [from Sunnis]]]].

(b‘) TT: …‫ذج‬٠‫اخٗ ِؼاسضح ؽذ‬ٚ ‫لذ‬

[… [ qad [ wajaha [ [mu‟arada] [shadeeda…]]].

Stylistic Changes in Articles: a, an, the.

(c) Trs: al jam‟eeyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeya tandur fi tarsheeh al maliki

(10) (a) ST: Iraq poised to choose new premier

(b) TT: ٟ‫ر اٌّاٌى‬١‫ ذشؽ‬ٟ‫ح ذٕضش ف‬١‫ح اٌؼشال‬١ٕ‫ط‬ٌٛ‫ح ا‬١‫اٌدّؼ‬

(c )Trs :al jam‟eeyah al wataneeyah al „raqeeya tandur fi tarsheeh al maliki

(11) (a) ST: Maliki endorsed as new Iraqi PM

Stylistic Changes in Conjunctions and Connectives.

(33) (a) ST: Syria decries Hariri probe „bias‟

(c) Trs:Wa wajaha al asad enteqadat le „amal al lejna qaelan ena al

(a‘) [ […the investigation had reached their conclusion first]